
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Coryc</id>
	<title>High5Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Coryc"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Coryc"/>
	<updated>2026-06-15T05:36:43Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.35.11</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Licensing_Issues&amp;diff=5464</id>
		<title>Licensing Issues</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Licensing_Issues&amp;diff=5464"/>
		<updated>2014-07-29T22:08:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Symptom&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: User get’s ‘Out of Seats’ message logging into SME when less than the licensed number of users are logged in to SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       Go to Help&amp;gt; Tech Support Utilities&amp;gt; Code 832 (Opens Windows Explorer to the SME folders&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       Log all users out of SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       Navigate to the Data\&amp;lt;company Name&amp;gt;\Locks folder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       Delete all files named ‘Gen###.net’&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Symptom:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; User tries to log into SME and receives message ‘SKA Error 4’&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       Go to the Windows Control Panel&amp;gt; Internet Options&amp;gt; Trusted Sites&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       Add the URL - https://secure.softwarekey.com&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       Add the URL - http://www.high5software.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Symptom&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: User get’s ‘Error creating license file Access violation at address ##### in module &amp;#039;Keylib32.dll&amp;#039; write of address’&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Cause: SME cannot write to the High5Software/Data/&amp;lt;InsertCompanyName&amp;gt;/Locks folder due to permissions issues.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       Go to the Windows Control Panel&amp;gt; Internet Options&amp;gt; Trusted Sites&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       Add the URL - https://secure.softwarekey.com&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       Add the URL - http://www.high5software.com&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       Go to Help&amp;gt; Tech Support Utilities&amp;gt; Code 832 (Opens Windows Explorer to the SME folders&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       Log all users out of SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       User ‘may’ also need to delete any and all  of the files listed below from the SME executable folder and data folders&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       high5.idx&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       high5.dat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       high5.lf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       sqlink.dat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       sqlink.idx&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       sqlink.lf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-       May need to also check Windows access permissions on the High5software folders and make sure all users have Windows permissions to the High5Software folders.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Making_a_connection_to_your_SME_database&amp;diff=5463</id>
		<title>Making a connection to your SME database</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Making_a_connection_to_your_SME_database&amp;diff=5463"/>
		<updated>2014-07-28T19:31:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;1)      Log on to your Server or Workstation hosting the SME database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2)      Navigate to the SME program folder&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3)      Locate and rename the Alias62.ini file to Alias62.old.ini or something similar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4)      Launch SME&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5)      SME will open the SME connection dialogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Database Connection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6)      Select your MS SQL Server instance name from the top drop down (If you do not know the SQL instance Name Open the old Alias62.ini file and look at the line: Server=&amp;lt;your Server\SQL instance&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7)      [[File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8)      Select your database name from the database field dropdown&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a.       The Database field is the lower of the two fields&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.      (Note: The path to the database should fill in automatically)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9)      Copy the database name to the Company name field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10)     [[File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Common Files Connection  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11)   Browse to your database Common Folders files, (CFPath) through the My Network Places UNC path&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12)     [[File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13)   \\server\High5Software\Data\&amp;lt;CompanyName&amp;gt;  Should look like this with your server &amp;amp; database name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
14)     [[File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
15)   Check Use as default: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
16)     [[File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
17)   Click ‘Ok’ to open SME&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Making_a_connection_to_your_SME_database&amp;diff=5462</id>
		<title>Making a connection to your SME database</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Making_a_connection_to_your_SME_database&amp;diff=5462"/>
		<updated>2014-07-28T19:29:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;1)      Log on to your Server or Workstation hosting the SME database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2)      Navigate to the SME program folder&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3)      Locate and rename the Alias62.ini file to Alias62.old.ini or something similar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4)      Launch SME&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5)      SME will open the SME connection dialogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Database Connection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6)      Select your MS SQL Server instance name from the top drop down (If you do not know the SQL instance Name Open the old Alias62.ini file and look at the line: Server=&amp;lt;your Server\SQL instance&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7)      [[File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8)      Select your database name from the database field dropdown&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a.       The Database field is the lower of the two fields&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.      (Note: The path to the database should fill in automatically)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9)      Copy the database name to the Company name field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10)     [[File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Common Files Connection  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11)   Browse to your database Common Folders files, (CFPath) through the My Network Places UNC path&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12)     [[File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_3.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Making_a_connection_to_your_SME_database&amp;diff=5461</id>
		<title>Making a connection to your SME database</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Making_a_connection_to_your_SME_database&amp;diff=5461"/>
		<updated>2014-07-28T19:28:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;1)      Log on to your Server or Workstation hosting the SME database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2)      Navigate to the SME program folder&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3)      Locate and rename the Alias62.ini file to Alias62.old.ini or something similar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4)      Launch SME&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5)      SME will open the SME connection dialogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Database Connection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6)      Select your MS SQL Server instance name from the top drop down (If you do not know the SQL instance Name Open the old Alias62.ini file and look at the line: Server=&amp;lt;your Server\SQL instance&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7)      [[File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8)      Select your database name from the database field dropdown&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a.       The Database field is the lower of the two fields&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.      (Note: The path to the database should fill in automatically)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9)      Copy the database name to the Company name field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10)     [[File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_2.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Making_a_connection_to_your_SME_database&amp;diff=5460</id>
		<title>Making a connection to your SME database</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Making_a_connection_to_your_SME_database&amp;diff=5460"/>
		<updated>2014-07-28T19:27:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;1)      Log on to your Server or Workstation hosting the SME database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2)      Navigate to the SME program folder&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3)      Locate and rename the Alias62.ini file to Alias62.old.ini or something similar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4)      Launch SME&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5)      SME will open the SME connection dialogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Database Connection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6)      Select your MS SQL Server instance name from the top drop down (If you do not know the SQL instance Name Open the old Alias62.ini file and look at the line: Server=&amp;lt;your Server\SQL instance&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7)      [[File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_1.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_5.png&amp;diff=5459</id>
		<title>File:SME Database Connection IMG 5.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_5.png&amp;diff=5459"/>
		<updated>2014-07-28T19:26:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_4.png&amp;diff=5458</id>
		<title>File:SME Database Connection IMG 4.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_4.png&amp;diff=5458"/>
		<updated>2014-07-28T19:26:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_3.png&amp;diff=5457</id>
		<title>File:SME Database Connection IMG 3.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_3.png&amp;diff=5457"/>
		<updated>2014-07-28T19:26:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_2.png&amp;diff=5456</id>
		<title>File:SME Database Connection IMG 2.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_2.png&amp;diff=5456"/>
		<updated>2014-07-28T19:26:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_1.png&amp;diff=5455</id>
		<title>File:SME Database Connection IMG 1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SME_Database_Connection_IMG_1.png&amp;diff=5455"/>
		<updated>2014-07-28T19:25:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Making_a_connection_to_your_SME_database&amp;diff=5454</id>
		<title>Making a connection to your SME database</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Making_a_connection_to_your_SME_database&amp;diff=5454"/>
		<updated>2014-07-28T19:22:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: Created page with &amp;quot;1)      Log on to your Server or Workstation hosting the SME database  2)      Navigate to the SME program folder  3)      Locate and rename the Alias62.ini file to Alias62.old.i...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;1)      Log on to your Server or Workstation hosting the SME database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2)      Navigate to the SME program folder&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3)      Locate and rename the Alias62.ini file to Alias62.old.ini or something similar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4)      Launch SME&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5)      SME will open the SME connection dialogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Database Connection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6)      Select your MS SQL Server instance name from the top drop down (If you do not know the SQL instance Name Open the old Alias62.ini file and look at the line: Server=&amp;lt;your Server\SQL instance&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Administration_Guides&amp;diff=5453</id>
		<title>SME Administration Guides</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Administration_Guides&amp;diff=5453"/>
		<updated>2014-07-28T19:21:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Installing SME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Installing SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Making a connection to your SME database]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Setting up a client computer to run SME]] (Preferred method)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Setting Up SME Client Users]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Local installation of the SME executable]] (Not the preferred method)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Set up of initial company data connection]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME on Remote Desktop or RDP]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME Hosted Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Updating SME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Updating SME 7.2]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Exclusive Access]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Updating SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Upgrading - SME 7.1 to 7.2]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Upgrading - SME 7.0 to 7.1]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Upgrading - SME 6.3 - 7.0]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Backing up SME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME Backups Best Practices]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Backing up your SME database using MS SQL Management Studio]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Installing Add On Products for SME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME Web Services Installation Guide]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Barcode for SME Installation Instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Tech Service for Android on SME Installation Instructions]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Automated Email Installation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Web Services Update]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME POS Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SME Hosted/ Remote&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Remote Desktop Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Importing into SME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Before Importing - About UID]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Importing Customers]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Importing Contacts for Customers]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Importing Inventory Items]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Importing Leads]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Importing contacts into Constant Contact]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Utilities]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;FAQ for Administrators&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SQLink Client Setup]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[FAQ - Connection Issues]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Drop down fields not working]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Licensing Issues]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Out of Seats when you are not out]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Regional Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Steps to create a new user profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SKA Error 4 message when opening SME]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Live Spelling - Reset Dictionary]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[End of Year Utilities]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Email Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recreating Inventory Detail Utility]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME and SQL Express]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Named Piped Provider: Could not open a connection to SQL Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Location Settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Merge_Database&amp;diff=5381</id>
		<title>Merge Database</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Merge_Database&amp;diff=5381"/>
		<updated>2014-07-14T16:51:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Title:  SME Merge Databases      &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;Subject:  Instructions of how to Merge SME databases.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;SME has the capability to merge databases.  For example&lt;br /&gt;
if you have database on an outside server that needs to merge into an inside&lt;br /&gt;
server, the SME merge capability will manage this.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;Please note that lots of data is transferring for merge&lt;br /&gt;
functionality and it’s not reversible or undo-able. It’s critical to have&lt;br /&gt;
backups of both databases prior to doing the merge.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;For&lt;br /&gt;
purposes of this instructions we will consider an Outside database called&lt;br /&gt;
OutsideDB that will be merged into an Inside database called InsideDB.  Your&lt;br /&gt;
database names will be different.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;Below&lt;br /&gt;
is an example of merging OutsideDB into InsideDB.  All new customers from the&lt;br /&gt;
outside are copied into the inside.  All matching customers from Outside and&lt;br /&gt;
Inside are not touched.  Any customers in Inside database only database are not&lt;br /&gt;
touched.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;Summary of steps:  You need to get the OutsideDB attached&lt;br /&gt;
to the SQL Server that the InsideDB is running on.  Once you attach the&lt;br /&gt;
OutsideDB to the Inside SQL Server, then it is ready for the merge.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;Steps:&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;1.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Note:&lt;br /&gt;
Be sure to have backups, especially of the InsideDB.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;2.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;From&lt;br /&gt;
the outside SQL Server, get a copy of the database files.  There are two ways&lt;br /&gt;
to do this: either make a backup or detach the database from the Outside SQL&lt;br /&gt;
Server make copies and then reattach.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:1.0in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;a.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Option&lt;br /&gt;
1, Backup method:  From SQL Management Studio on the Outside SQL Sever, select&lt;br /&gt;
the OutsideDB, right click and select backup.  Select the location to save the&lt;br /&gt;
backup.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:1.0in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;b.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Option&lt;br /&gt;
2, Detach method:  From SQL Management Studio on the Outside SQL Server, select&lt;br /&gt;
OutsideDB and right click and select detach and follow the instructions to&lt;br /&gt;
detach.  Then make copies of the OutsideDB.mdf and OutsideDB_log.ldf files.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;3.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Copy&lt;br /&gt;
the files created from step 2 to the Inside server.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;4.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;From&lt;br /&gt;
the inside SQL Server, run SQL Management studio so you can attach OutsideDB to&lt;br /&gt;
this SQL Server instance.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:1.0in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;a.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Option1,&lt;br /&gt;
Backup method from step 2: Right click on the database and select Restore. &lt;br /&gt;
Select the backup file from step 3 to restore and follow the instructions.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:1.0in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;b.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Option&lt;br /&gt;
2, Detach method from step 2:  Right click on the database and select Attach. &lt;br /&gt;
Select the files copied from step 3 and follow the instructions.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;5.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You&lt;br /&gt;
are now ready to merge.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;6.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Run&lt;br /&gt;
SME on the Inside server.  Select InsideDB.  It’s important to run SME on the&lt;br /&gt;
database that is going to be merged into.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;7.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Select&lt;br /&gt;
Utilities&amp;amp;gt;Utilities&amp;amp;gt;Import Data&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;8.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Select&lt;br /&gt;
Merge from Database and select run it.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;9.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Select&lt;br /&gt;
OutsideDB and select Ok to start the merge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;10.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;When the merge is&lt;br /&gt;
completed, you can detach the OutsideDB from the inside sql server as follows:&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:1.0in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;a.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Within&lt;br /&gt;
SQL Management Studio, right click on the OutsideDB and select detach and&lt;br /&gt;
follow the instructions.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink_-_For_QuickBooks&amp;diff=5380</id>
		<title>SQLink - For QuickBooks</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink_-_For_QuickBooks&amp;diff=5380"/>
		<updated>2014-07-14T16:39:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SQLink for QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SME to  QuickBooks  Link Synchronization Tool&lt;br /&gt;
Definitions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) QB: QuickBooks® by Intuit®&lt;br /&gt;
2) SME: Service Management Professional (version 5) by High 5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
3) SQLink: SME to QB synchronization program by High 5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SQLink for QuickBooks is a robust syncing engine linking SME and QuickBooks information. The sync process encompasses four programs:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*SME – Service Management Enterprise&lt;br /&gt;
*SQLink – SME to QuickBooks Import- Export data engine.&lt;br /&gt;
*QuickBooks by Intuit – all versions from 2004 to the current year. (Note: We have encountered some issues syncing with unsupported versions of QuickBooks . Review the following link regarding Intuit Sunset policies. [http://support.quickbooks.intuit.com/support/pages/knowledgebasearticle/1003113]&lt;br /&gt;
*QBFC – QuickBooks File Connector XML parsing engine. Runs behind the scenes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following information covers SME to QuickBooks Sync Points, SQLink Initial Setup, and a module list covering setup, optional settings, and troubleshooting common errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sync Points for SQLink]] - Sync points between SME and QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Initial Setup for SQLink]] - Running SQLink for the first time with your QuickBooks file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Performing the sync. The sync process can be performed in two ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[SQLink Full Sync]] - How to perform the full sync process. SME to QuickBooks and QuickBooks to SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Module Sync - How to perform a module by module import/export or manual sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
QuickBooks lists have character length limitations. THe following page outlines the field length differances between SME and QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SQLink - QuickBooks Name Length limitations]] - QuickBooks Name Length Limitations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following details will be updated soon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sync details by module&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Customers]] - Customer syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Vendors]] - Vendor syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Employees and Technicians]] - Employee and Technician syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Inventory]] - Inventory syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Invoices]] - Invoice syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Payments]] - Payment syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Tech Time]] - Tech syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Purchase Orders]] - Purchase Order syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Subcontractor Bills and PO&amp;#039;s]] Subcontractor syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Troubleshooting errors by module&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Customers]] - Troubleshooting Customer errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Vendors]] - Troubleshooting Vendor errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Techs and Users]] - Troubleshooting Tech and User errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Inventory]] - Troubleshooting Inventory errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Invoices]] - Troubleshooting Invoicing errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Payments]] - Troubleshooting Payment errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Tech Time]] - Troubleshooting - Tech time entry errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Purchase Orders]] - Troubleshooting - Purchase Order errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Subcontractor Bills and PO&amp;#039;s]] - Troubleshooting - Subcontractor Billing and Purchase Order errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - TroubleShooting Connection Issues]] - Troubleshooting Connection Issues with SQLink&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink_-_For_QuickBooks&amp;diff=5379</id>
		<title>SQLink - For QuickBooks</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink_-_For_QuickBooks&amp;diff=5379"/>
		<updated>2014-07-14T16:38:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SQLink for QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SME to  QuickBooks  Link Synchronization Tool&lt;br /&gt;
Definitions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) QB: QuickBooks® by Intuit®&lt;br /&gt;
2) SME: Service Management Professional (version 5) by High 5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
3) SQLink: SME to QB synchronization program by High 5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SQLink for QuickBooks is a robust syncing engine linking SME and QuickBooks information. The sync process encompasses four programs:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*SME – Service Management Enterprise&lt;br /&gt;
*SQLink – SME to QuickBooks Import- Export data engine.&lt;br /&gt;
*QuickBooks by Intuit – all versions from 2004 to the current year. (Note: We have encountered some issues syncing with unsupported versions of QuickBooks . Review the following link regarding Intuit Sunset policies. [http://support.quickbooks.intuit.com/support/pages/knowledgebasearticle/1003113]&lt;br /&gt;
*QBFC – QuickBooks File Connector XML parsing engine. Runs behind the scenes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following information covers SME to QuickBooks Sync Points, SQLink Initial Setup, and a module list covering setup, optional settings, and troubleshooting common errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sync Points for SQLink]] - Sync points between SME and QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Initial Setup for SQLink]] - Running SQLink for the first time with your QuickBooks file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Performing the sync. The sync process can be performed in two ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[SQLink Full Sync]] - How to perform the full sync process. SME to QuickBooks and QuickBooks to SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Module Sync - How to perform a module by module import/export or manual sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
QuickBooks lists have character length limitations. THe following page outlines the field length differances between SME and QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SQLink - QuickBooks Name Length limitations]] - QuickBooks Name Length Limitations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following details will be updated soon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sync details by module&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Customers]] - Customer syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Vendors]] - Vendor syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Employees and Technicians]] - Employee and Technician syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Inventory)) - Inventory syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Invoices)) - Invoice syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Payments)) - Payment syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Tech Time)) - Tech syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Purchase Orders)) - Purchase Order syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Subcontractor Bills and PO&amp;#039;s)) Subcontractor syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Troubleshouting errors by module&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Customers]] - Troubleshooting Customer errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Vendors]] - Troubleshooting Vendor errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Techs and Users]] - Troubleshooting Tech and User errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Inventory]] - Troubleshooting Inventory errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Invoices]] - Troubleshooting Invoicing errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Payments]] - Troubleshooting Payment errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Tech Time]] - Troubleshooting - Tech time entry errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Purchase Orders]] - Troubleshooting - Purchase Order errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Subcontractor Bills and PO&amp;#039;s]] - Troubleshooting - Subcontractor Billing and Purchase Order errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - TroubleShooting Connection Issues]] - Troubleshooting Connection Issues with SQLink&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink_-_For_QuickBooks&amp;diff=5378</id>
		<title>SQLink - For QuickBooks</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink_-_For_QuickBooks&amp;diff=5378"/>
		<updated>2014-07-14T16:37:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SQLink for QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SME to  QuickBooks  Link Synchronization Tool&lt;br /&gt;
Definitions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) QB: QuickBooks® by Intuit®&lt;br /&gt;
2) SME: Service Management Professional (version 5) by High 5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
3) SQLink: SME to QB synchronization program by High 5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SQLink for QuickBooks is a robust syncing engine linking SME and QuickBooks information. The sync process encompasses four programs:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*SME – Service Management Enterprise&lt;br /&gt;
*SQLink – SME to QuickBooks Import- Export data engine.&lt;br /&gt;
*QuickBooks by Intuit – all versions from 2004 to the current year. (Note: We have encountered some issues syncing with unsupported versions of QuickBooks . Review the following link regarding Intuit Sunset policies. [http://support.quickbooks.intuit.com/support/pages/knowledgebasearticle/1003113]&lt;br /&gt;
*QBFC – QuickBooks File Connector XML parsing engine. Runs behind the scenes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following information covers SME to QuickBooks Sync Points, SQLink Initial Setup, and a module list covering setup, optional settings, and troubleshooting common errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sync Points for SQLink]] - Sync points between SME and QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Initial Setup for SQLink]] - Running SQLink for the first time with your QuickBooks file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Performing the sync. The sync process can be performed in two ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[SQLink Full Sync]] - How to perform the full sync process. SME to QuickBooks and QuickBooks to SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Module Sync - How to perform a module by module import/export or manual sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
QuickBooks lists have character length limitations. THe following page outlines the field length differances between SME and QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SQLink - QuickBooks Name Length limitations]] - QuickBooks Name Length Limitations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following details will be updated soon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sync details by module&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Customers]] - Customer syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Vendors]] - Vendor syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Employees and Technicians]] - Employee and Technician syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Inventory)) - Inventory syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Invoices)) - Invoice syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Payments)) - Payment syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Tech Time)) - Tech syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Purchase Orders)) - Purchase Order syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Subcontractor Bills and PO&amp;#039;s)) Subcontractor syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Troubleshouting errors by module&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Customers]] - Troubleshouting Customer errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Vendors]] - Troubleshouting Vendor errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Techs and Users]] - Troubleshouting Tech and User erors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Inventory]] - Troubleshouting Inventory errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Invoices]] - Troubleshouting Invoicing errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Payments]] - Troubleshouting Payment errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Tech Time]] - Troubleshouting - Tech time entry errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Purchase Orders]] - Troubleshouting - Purchase Order errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Subcontractor Bills and PO&amp;#039;s]] - Troubleshouting - Subcontractor Billing and Purchase Order errors&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - TroubleShooting Connection Issues]] - Troubleshooting Connection Issues with SQLink&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink_-_For_QuickBooks&amp;diff=5377</id>
		<title>SQLink - For QuickBooks</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink_-_For_QuickBooks&amp;diff=5377"/>
		<updated>2014-07-14T16:35:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SQLink for QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SME to  QuickBooks  Link Synchronization Tool&lt;br /&gt;
Definitions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) QB: QuickBooks® by Intuit®&lt;br /&gt;
2) SME: Service Management Professional (version 5) by High 5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
3) SQLink: SME to QB synchronization program by High 5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SQLink for QuickBooks is a robust syncing engine linking SME and QuickBooks information. The sync process encompasses four programs:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*SME – Service Management Enterprise&lt;br /&gt;
*SQLink – SME to QuickBooks Import- Export data engine.&lt;br /&gt;
*QuickBooks by Intuit – all versions from 2004 to the current year. (Note: We have encountered some issues syncing with unsupported versions of QuickBooks . Review the following link regarding Intuit Sunset policies. [http://support.quickbooks.intuit.com/support/pages/knowledgebasearticle/1003113]&lt;br /&gt;
*QBFC – QuickBooks File Connector XML parsing engine. Runs behind the scenes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following information covers SME to QuickBooks Sync Points, SQLink Initial Setup, and a module list covering setup, optional settings, and troubleshooting common errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sync Points for SQLink]] - Sync points between SME and QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Initial Setup for SQLink]] - Running SQLink for the first time with your QuickBooks file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Performing the sync. The sync process can be performed in two ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[SQLink Full Sync]] - How to perform the full sync process. SME to QuickBooks and QuickBooks to SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Module Sync - How to perform a module by module import/export or manual sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
QuickBooks lists have character length limitations. THe following page outlines the field length differances between SME and QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SQLink - QuickBooks Name Length limitations]] - QuickBooks Name Length Limitations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following details will be updated soon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sync details by module&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Customers]] - Customer syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Vendors]] - Vendor syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Employees and Technicians]] - Employee and Technician syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Inventory)) - Inventory syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Invoices)) - Invoice syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Payments)) - Payment syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Tech Time)) - Tech syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Purchase Orders)) - Purchase Order syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Subcontractor Bills and PO&amp;#039;s)) Subcontractor syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Troubleshouting errors by module&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Customers]] - Troubleshouting Customer errors&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Vendors)) - Troubleshouting Vendor errors&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Techs and Users)) - Troubleshouting Tech and User erors&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Inventory)) - Troubleshouting Inventory errors&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Invoices)) - Troubleshouting Invoicing errors&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Payments)) - Troubleshouting Payment errors&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Tech Time)) - Troubleshouting - Tech time entry errors&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Purchase Orders)) - Troubleshouting - Purchase Order errors&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Subcontractor Bills and PO&amp;#039;s)) - Troubleshouting - Subcontractor Billing and Purchase Order errors&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - TroubleShooting Connection Issues)) - Troubleshooting Connection Issues with SQLink&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Common_SQLink_Errors&amp;diff=5334</id>
		<title>Common SQLink Errors</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Common_SQLink_Errors&amp;diff=5334"/>
		<updated>2014-06-30T17:52:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Best Practices for addressing SQLink Errors ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Fix errors as they occur.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fix errors in the sequence illustrated in the image below starting with Customer errors and ending with Proposal errors.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FixSequence.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 702 ==&lt;br /&gt;
702 - 702: The query request has not been fully completed. There was a required element (&amp;quot;800005BC-1267498278&amp;quot;) that could not be found in QuickBooks. The element (########-#########) is the QB term for an item; Customer, Vendor, Employee, Inventory, Service, Account, etc...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The string - (&amp;quot;800005BC-1267498278&amp;quot; - is the QB ID for an item in QB) - means that the item, a customer, invoice, account, service, etc... used to be in QB but it now has a new QB ID or has otherwise been modified in QB. Modifications can include setting the item as inactive, deleting or merging it with another item, etc... To resolve look at all items related to the error and make sure they exist in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
* - If it&amp;#039;s a customer, make sure the customer is active.&lt;br /&gt;
* - If it&amp;#039;s an invoice it should re-export creating a new QB ID.&lt;br /&gt;
* - If it&amp;#039;s an inventory/service item review them on the invoice and make sure they are all QB items.&lt;br /&gt;
* - Check SQLink defaults and make sure all accounts on the default tabs in SQLink are present and active in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
* - Open SQLink&amp;gt; File&amp;gt; Setup&amp;gt; check all tabs and make sure the listed items are active in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 805 ==&lt;br /&gt;
Error adding XYZ Company - 805: The name &amp;quot; XYZ Company &amp;quot; of the list element is already in use&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means that the name - &amp;quot;XYZ Company&amp;quot; - is already in QB on a list. User needs to locate it in QB and add something to the name. QB convention is (V) if on the vendor list, (E), if on the employee list, etc...  If it&amp;#039;s already on the customer list add (SME) and merge it in QB with the original.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 899 ==&lt;br /&gt;
Error adding XYZ Company - 899: The string &amp;quot;ST. FRANCIS OF ASSISI CATH. CHURCH - VIDEO&amp;quot; in the field &amp;quot;Addr1&amp;quot; is too long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to shorten the address to less than 40 characters. There are tools available online to help you count characters such as http://www.lettercount.com/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 899 -  You cannot pay more than the amount due==&lt;br /&gt;
899: The &amp;quot;AppliedToTxnAdd payment amount&amp;quot; field has an invalid value &amp;quot;3353.98&amp;quot;.  QuickBooks error message: You cannot pay more than the amount due.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This error occurs when QuickBooks cannot mark an invoice as paid because the invoice balance and the applied amount are in conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
They payment cannot be applied to the QuickBooks invoice because it has already been paid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SQLink Error 808 ==&lt;br /&gt;
SQLink Error 808: Error adding  Customer XYZ 808: There is an invalid reference to a parent &amp;quot;80000004-1207320348&amp;quot; in the Customers list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
QuickBooks error message: To change parent or type when the element or its descendants has been used in a transaction, you must switch to single-user mode. &amp;lt;- QuickBooks must be in single user mode.&lt;br /&gt;
This error happens when the billing address is changed on a site customer record in SME. I do not recommend making these changes in SME. This specifically happens when you click the &amp;#039;Select Billing Company&amp;#039; button or uncheck the &amp;#039;Is Billable Flag&amp;#039; on the Billing Address and select a new parent/billing customer. Since QuickBooks has special limitations on moving customers between Parent/Billing companies it is always best to do this in QuickBooks. There are two issue that QuickBooks raises:&lt;br /&gt;
-       QB must be in Single User mode to make the change&lt;br /&gt;
-       If the change cannot be done due to QB rules you will be warned&lt;br /&gt;
There are a couple of ways to move customers in QB. One is available from the following video link and one is by dragging the customer to a new parent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Link to the Video:[[Move QB Customers to Job Sites]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other is to place the cursor over the customer and drag it to the new parent. If there are payments, etc.. you will not be able to move the customer. This will also return an error in SQLink since if QB cannot move it then SQLink cannot move it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These issues are why I recommend &amp;#039;only&amp;#039; reassigning  customers in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This error can also come up on Invoices as: Invoice ######## skipped - Billing Link ID not initialized. The usual cause is either the site/job or the Billing customer has been set to inactive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 810 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
810: There was an error when saving a Invoice.  QuickBooks error message: The transaction is empty.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case the invoice was a combined invoice and the order on the invoice was removed or deleted. Go to invoice in SME and either uncheck &amp;quot;export to QB&amp;quot; or delete invoice.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can also come up as &amp;#039;The transaction must be positive&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Go to invoice in SME and either uncheck &amp;quot;export to QB&amp;quot; or delete invoice.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can also come up as &amp;#039;Invoice ##### skipped - voided invoices cannot be exported&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Go to invoice in SME and either uncheck &amp;quot;export to QB&amp;quot; or delete invoice.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This error can also come under PO as: 810: There was an error when saving a Bill.  QuickBooks error message: This transaction action is not allowed for this user. - Probable causes are the user running SQLink does not have permission to modify bills in QuickBooks or the closing date has been set and a QB Admin would need to modify the restriction to export the PO/Bill. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 851 : Unable to find the QuickBooks Request Processor ==&lt;br /&gt;
851 : Unable to find the QuickBooks Request PRrocessor on your system. Please make sure that QuickBooks 2002 Pro or higher is installed on your system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download and run the installer from the following link. &lt;br /&gt;
QBFC 11.0: http://high5software.com/downloads/QB/QBFC11_0Installer.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 201 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Error adding  201: Required field CustomerName not specified.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Error 201 can pertain to any Customer, Vendor, Inventory, Service Item, etc.. record where the Name field is blank.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To correct:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-       Go to the module referenced, Customer in the case above&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-       Do Search All and click on the Name field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-       You will see a blank record&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-       Select the record&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-       Check if the record should be tied to a specific customer. If the record has no information you can safely set it as inactive and delete it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 819 - Error adding XYZ – The object may not be changed==&lt;br /&gt;
This is part of the – ‘Unknown error’ returned from QB – seems sometimes it returns an error # and others it does not. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          If switched to Single user – they may get - XYZ Company – Unknown error returned from QuickBooks… this means QB cannot move the child to a new parent due to history on the child company like payments, invoices, etc.. – (See below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          Additional info to above… can also be reported as Error 819&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          Error adding XYZ 819 – (The object may not be changed). Error adding XYZ  819: There was an error when modifying a Customers list, element &amp;quot;800009F6-1300911661&amp;quot;.  QuickBooks error message: Unknown Error. The Customer List Element is the QuickBooks UID for the customer you have flagged to move in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          To Resolve: Review QuickBooks for the XYZ company and reset the SME companies to match what they were before the ‘Is Billable’ flag was lifted or the Billing/Parent Company was changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Duplicate Customer ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you see the following error in SQLink, there is a duplicate customer in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer : XYZ is skipped due to duplication&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can follow the following steps to resolve the error or watch the video below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;5EC0ZdD3I7I&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Find which customer record is the duplicate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Customers&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Views&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    In the Grid Column Window, check the following fields: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Name, BillName, Address 1, Address 2, City, St, CustID, ParentID, QBExport. Click OK.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#    Arrange the columns the way you want in the search view window.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Views&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Type a name for the view and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    In the search view window, sort by &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Locate the customer name SQLink said is a duplicate.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Follow the row to the CustID column. If the column is empty, that is your duplicate customer record. Double click to open the duplicate.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click your cursor in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field to edit the customer name. Type (&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;) after the customer name. This makes it unique and easy to identify when reassigning orders and invoices for the duplicate customer.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Now that you found which customer is the duplicate record, check to see if there is any activity for customer you need to reassign&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Activity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#    If there is an invoice on this tab, double click on it. SME will jump to the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rollback Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Go back to the duplicate customer.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Activity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab to check to see if there is a service order assocaited with the &amp;quot;DUP&amp;quot; customer. &lt;br /&gt;
#    If there is a serivce order, double click on it. SME will jump to the order.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click [[File:Magnify.jpg]] to search for the correct customer. In the search window, select the correct customer record, not the &amp;quot;(DUP)&amp;quot; record.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Save the service order.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Generate Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to re-invoice the order.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Follow steps 1-9 for install orders and invoices for the install orders.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Now the activity associated with the duplicate customer are assigned to the correct customer, delete the duplicate customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;quot;DUP&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; customer.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to delete the customer record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Link ID not initialized ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you receive the following SQLink error, you were trying to sync an invoice to QuickBooks that didn&amp;#039;t have a valid customer in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice #XXX skipped - Customer link ID not initialized&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is usually caused by duplicate customer records in SME. Click here to watch a video on how to resolve the duplicate customer on an invoice and sync the invoice properly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;5EC0ZdD3I7I&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the video, when the service order was re-invoiced, we let SME assign a new invoice number. If you need to retain the original invoice number, instead of clicking Action&amp;gt; Generate Invoice on the order, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*    Write down the order number that needs to be re-invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
*    Go to the correct customer record (not the DUP customer).&lt;br /&gt;
*    Click Actions&amp;gt; New Combined Invoice. SME will jump to the new invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
*    On the Details and Settings tab, locate the Invoice # field. Click [[File:browse.jpg]] to enter the invoice number you want to use. (If you don’t see this icon, you need to add the permission to initialize numbers to your user group settings)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InvoiceNumberField.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*    Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Install Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab to select the order you need to invoice (the invoice number you wrote down in the first step above).&lt;br /&gt;
*    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Error Connecting to QuickBooks ==&lt;br /&gt;
When syncing SME to QuickBooks, if you receive the message &amp;quot;Error Connecting to QuickBooks&amp;quot;, you are logging into QuickBooks with a path that is different than that refereced by SQLink. This typically happens if you open QuickBooks on a client and try to sync when the initial sync was established on the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run SQLink on client machines, you will need to do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    From the client computer, browse to the sme5 executable folder and locate the SQLink Documentation folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Run the QBFC7_0Installer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, SQLink and QuickBooks must reference the same path to access the QuickBooks company file. to check this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Open QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Press &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;F2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to open the Product Information window.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File Information&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; section and make note of the path in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Launch SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quick Books Company File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.  The path in this field must be the same as the path noted in QuickBooks (step 3 above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== List Element Error ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When running SQLink with QuickBooks the following message is returned in the SQLink Log:&lt;br /&gt;
Error adding (Item Name*) 819: There was an error when modifying a (can be any type of name) list, element** &amp;quot;3170000-1189020798&amp;quot;. QuickBooks error message: Cannot merge list elements.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* An item in QB can be a customer name, vendor name, inventory item, etc…&lt;br /&gt;
** Element “#######-#########” is the QuickBooks unique identifier&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Basically either the ‘Name’ or the ‘Element’ is on a list in QuickBooks and therefore the item that SME is exporting will be rejected by QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For example:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both ListID and the Name are unique keys in QuickBooks. And you modified a customer which prompts to export that Customer with the ListID that matches an existing ListID in QB and the Item Name from another record or the Item Name matches, a more likely scenario, and the ListID is different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This produces the &amp;quot;Cannot merge list elements&amp;quot; error message back from QuickBooks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Customer - CustID&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Invoice - InvoiceID&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Vendor - VendorID&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Inventory - InventoryID&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Service Item - ServiceID&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Employee - EmployeeID&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Usually for all SME modules there will be an item/column with &amp;lt;name&amp;gt;ID which holds the QB list UID.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To include the QuickBooks ID number in the search window:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. In the search window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Views&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add remove fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the window that opens, check the QuickBooks ID field for that module (list above)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Name the field and Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For more information about search views, go to [[Search Window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Example Error:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Error adding Bill10506 &lt;br /&gt;
807: Object &amp;quot;80000016-308248122&amp;quot; specified in the request cannot be found.  QuickBooks error message: Invalid argument.  The specified record does not exist in the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Solution:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers “80000016-308248122” are referring to an inventory item that QB says no longer exists in QB. It may be inactive, deleted, or related to the inactive parent. You can research it as noted above and shown below in the screenshot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InventoryID_SearchView.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To resolve this issue:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.    Examine the SQLink log: Look at the error:&lt;br /&gt;
*        Error adding Customer A 819: There was an error when modifying a Customers list, element &amp;quot;3170000-1189020798&amp;quot;. QuickBooks error message: Cannot merge list elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.    In QuickBooks, locate and edit the name of the vendor/customer:&lt;br /&gt;
*        Choose &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job List&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; List, or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item List, etc&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;… as needs may require.&lt;br /&gt;
*        Locate and double-click the name noted in the SQLink Log.&lt;br /&gt;
*        Place a 1 at the end of the name and click OK. Leave QuickBooks and this list open.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.    In SQLink do &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Data Functions&amp;gt; Export New QuickBooks Data&amp;gt; (List Item)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. In this case it will be Customers. There should be no error for the specific record and it will export to QuickBooks and sit right next to the QuickBooks Record.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.    In QuickBooks, merge the edited name with the name that has been created by the SQLink:&lt;br /&gt;
*        In the open list in QuickBooks, double-click the name to which you added a 1.&lt;br /&gt;
*        Remove the 1 from the name and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*        When asked if you would like to merge the names, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Do this for all items that have the issue from the SME log.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Error - QBFC Not Found ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QBFC_Not_Found.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The QBFC program is local to the logged on user. Download and run the installer from the following link.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;QBFC 11.0: http://high5software.com/downloads/QB/QBFC11_0Installer.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink stops processing in the middle of a sync ==&lt;br /&gt;
If SQLink stops processing in the middle of your sync, you can look at the log file and find out what item is holding up the sync or if there is an error connecting to QuickBooks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Right click on your SQLink shortcut and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;open file location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Double click on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Log&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; folder&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Sort by modified date and locate the file modified last, it will probably be a sqlink file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. Right click, not double click, on the file and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5. Scroll to the bottom of the file and you will see the item that is holding up the sync. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==QB Invoice number has changed ==&lt;br /&gt;
Processing 10 of 110 Invoices (Ref #405-I)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;QB Invoice number has changed : QB = 405-I SMP = 405&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Invoice numbers in SME are numeric only. Invoice numbers in QuickBooks are strings so they can have numbers and letters. When the invoice from QB syncs to SME, the letters will be taken out of the invoice number in SME. Your invoice number in QB isn&amp;#039;t changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Error adding customer XYZ 810: There was an error when saving a customers list, element ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Error adding Custer XYZ   810: There was an error when saving a Customers list, element &amp;quot; Custer XYZ&amp;quot;.  QuickBooks error message: This customer already has job information. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To add a new job, the customer&amp;#039;s current job information must be moved into its own job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Invoice #12345 skipped - Customer is inactive ==&lt;br /&gt;
Adding (X) Invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Processing 1 of (X) invoices (#12345)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Invoice #12345 skipped - Customer is inactive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Retrieve the Invoice and get the customer name. Check the name in both SME and QuickBooks and set the customer as active to export an invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Purchase Order 12345 skipped - no received items to export ==&lt;br /&gt;
Adding Purchase Orders to QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Processing 1 of (X) Purchase Orders&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Purchase Order 12345 skipped - no received items to export&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The ‘Export To QuickBooks’ flag is set when there are no received items to export. There are two flags, QB Bill Export and QB PO Export. Uncheck the flag as it will get set if items are received on the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Payment not distributed ==&lt;br /&gt;
Payment not distributed means that there is no invoice associated with the payment. For a payment to export from SME to QB it has to have an invoice attached. I would do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Delete the payment from the Payments module&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2) Go to Receivables &amp;gt; Invoicing and go to the invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3) Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payments&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and enter the payment&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That way you are assured that it is attached to an invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the invoice in QB you can also apply the payment in QB and it will sync back to SME and close the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== There is no disk in the drive.  Please insert a disk into drive E. ==&lt;br /&gt;
This happens when USB devises are removed without first ejecting the media. This can happen either from USB or DVD/CD devises. You may also need to put a readable DVD or CD in your removable drives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A quick way to stop the error from popping up is to quickly click the &amp;quot;Save to file&amp;quot; button in lower right corner. You can click &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot; on the window that opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;SQLink_SaveToFile.png&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prevent the error from happening in the future:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. First look at the removable USB devises icon next to the system clock.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;    [[File:RemovableDisc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. When you put the mouse over the icon you’ll see the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;    [[File:SafelyRemove.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click on the icon and you will see all USB related devises&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;    [[File:EjectFlash.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Remove all drive related entries that are not currently plugged in. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Place a disk in all DVD/CD drives. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. This should clear up the issue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;More info on the topic:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;http://ccrqblog.ccrsoftware.info/2010/02/stopping-the-windows-no-disk-error/ &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For more dire cases do the following:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Right click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;My Computer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Manage&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Device Manager&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Disk Drives&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Count how many &amp;quot;Drives&amp;quot; that your computer is currently using.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. When the Error message pops up then count how many &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Drives&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; it&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; On some computers you will see duplicate entries in your device manager. You will need to Disable the duplicates.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DuplicateDiscs.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== QuickBooks warning 550 ==&lt;br /&gt;
999: Unrecognized QuickBooks warning: 550: The Customers object was saved successfully, but its corresponding Notes record could not be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This is a warning / bug from QuickBooks which High5 can&amp;#039;t do anything about. The record should be updated with the sync, but to stop getting the error you must go to the record in QuickBooks and enter any character in the Notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SQLink Error 511 - QBRequestID has been used previously for another request ==&lt;br /&gt;
This message is from QuickBooks. Usually closing and reopening QB will clear the message and reset the request processor. We&amp;#039;ve noticed that the QB ID generator sometimes gets stuck, and when it does, this is the outcome. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Error511_QBRequestID.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To resolve, close QuickBooks and reopen. This should reset the QuickBooks ID generation&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Common_SQLink_Errors&amp;diff=5333</id>
		<title>Common SQLink Errors</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Common_SQLink_Errors&amp;diff=5333"/>
		<updated>2014-06-30T17:51:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Best Practices for addressing SQLink Errors ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Fix errors as they occur.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fix errors in the sequence illustrated in the image below starting with Customer errors and ending with Proposal errors.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FixSequence.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 702 ==&lt;br /&gt;
702 - 702: The query request has not been fully completed. There was a required element (&amp;quot;800005BC-1267498278&amp;quot;) that could not be found in QuickBooks. The element (########-#########) is the QB term for an item; Customer, Vendor, Employee, Inventory, Service, Account, etc...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The string - (&amp;quot;800005BC-1267498278&amp;quot; - is the QB ID for an item in QB) - means that the item, a customer, invoice, account, service, etc... used to be in QB but it now has a new QB ID or has otherwise been modified in QB. Modifications can include setting the item as inactive, deleting or merging it with another item, etc... To resolve look at all items related to the error and make sure they exist in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
* - If it&amp;#039;s a customer, make sure the customer is active.&lt;br /&gt;
* - If it&amp;#039;s an invoice it should re-export creating a new QB ID.&lt;br /&gt;
* - If it&amp;#039;s an inventory/service item review them on the invoice and make sure they are all QB items.&lt;br /&gt;
* - Check SQLink defaults and make sure all accounts on the default tabs in SQLink are present and active in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
* - Open SQLink&amp;gt; File&amp;gt; Setup&amp;gt; check all tabs and make sure the listed items are active in QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 805 ==&lt;br /&gt;
Error adding XYZ Company - 805: The name &amp;quot; XYZ Company &amp;quot; of the list element is already in use&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means that the name - &amp;quot;XYZ Company&amp;quot; - is already in QB on a list. User needs to locate it in QB and add something to the name. QB convention is (V) if on the vendor list, (E), if on the employee list, etc...  If it&amp;#039;s already on the customer list add (SME) and merge it in QB with the original.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 899 ==&lt;br /&gt;
Error adding XYZ Company - 899: The string &amp;quot;ST. FRANCIS OF ASSISI CATH. CHURCH - VIDEO&amp;quot; in the field &amp;quot;Addr1&amp;quot; is too long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to shorten the address to less than 40 characters. There are tools available online to help you count characters such as http://www.lettercount.com/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 899 -  You cannot pay more than the amount due==&lt;br /&gt;
899: The &amp;quot;AppliedToTxnAdd payment amount&amp;quot; field has an invalid value &amp;quot;3353.98&amp;quot;.  QuickBooks error message: You cannot pay more than the amount due.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This error occurs when QuickBooks cannot mark an invoice as paid because the invoice balance and the applied amount are in conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
They payment cannot be applied to the QuickBooks invoice because it has already been paid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SQLink Error 808 ==&lt;br /&gt;
SQLink Error 808: Error adding  Customer XYZ 808: There is an invalid reference to a parent &amp;quot;80000004-1207320348&amp;quot; in the Customers list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
QuickBooks error message: To change parent or type when the element or its descendants has been used in a transaction, you must switch to single-user mode. &amp;lt;- QuickBooks must be in single user mode.&lt;br /&gt;
This error happens when the billing address is changed on a site customer record in SME. I do not recommend making these changes in SME. This specifically happens when you click the &amp;#039;Select Billing Company&amp;#039; button or uncheck the &amp;#039;Is Billable Flag&amp;#039; on the Billing Address and select a new parent/billing customer. Since QuickBooks has special limitations on moving customers between Parent/Billing companies it is always best to do this in QuickBooks. There are two issue that QuickBooks raises:&lt;br /&gt;
-       QB must be in Single User mode to make the change&lt;br /&gt;
-       If the change cannot be done due to QB rules you will be warned&lt;br /&gt;
There are a couple of ways to move customers in QB. One is available from the following video link and one is by dragging the customer to a new parent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Link to the Video:[[Move QB Customers to Job Sites]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other is to place the cursor over the customer and drag it to the new parent. If there are payments, etc.. you will not be able to move the customer. This will also return an error in SQLink since if QB cannot move it then SQLink cannot move it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These issues are why I recommend &amp;#039;only&amp;#039; reassigning  customers in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This error can also come up on Invoices as: Invoice ######## skipped - Billing Link ID not initialized. The usual cause is either the site/job or the Billing customer has been set to inactive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 810 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
810: There was an error when saving a Invoice.  QuickBooks error message: The transaction is empty.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case the invoice was a combined invoice and the order on the invoice was removed or deleted. Go to invoice in SME and either uncheck &amp;quot;export to QB&amp;quot; or delete invoice.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can also come up as &amp;#039;The transaction must be positive&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Go to invoice in SME and either uncheck &amp;quot;export to QB&amp;quot; or delete invoice.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can also come up as &amp;#039;Invoice ##### skipped - voided invoices cannot be exported&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Go to invoice in SME and either uncheck &amp;quot;export to QB&amp;quot; or delete invoice.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This error can also come under PO as: 810: There was an error when saving a Bill.  QuickBooks error message: This transaction action is not allowed for this user. - Probable causes are the user running SQLink does not have permission to modify bills in QuickBooks or the closing date has been set and a QB Admin would need to modify the restriction to export the PO/Bill. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 851 : Unable to find the QuickBooks Request Processor ==&lt;br /&gt;
851 : Unable to find the QuickBooks Request PRocessor on your system. Please make sure that QuickBooks 2002 Pro or higher is installed on your system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 201 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Error adding  201: Required field CustomerName not specified.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Error 201 can pertain to any Customer, Vendor, Inventory, Service Item, etc.. record where the Name field is blank.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To correct:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-       Go to the module referenced, Customer in the case above&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-       Do Search All and click on the Name field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-       You will see a blank record&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-       Select the record&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-       Check if the record should be tied to a specific customer. If the record has no information you can safely set it as inactive and delete it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink Error 819 - Error adding XYZ – The object may not be changed==&lt;br /&gt;
This is part of the – ‘Unknown error’ returned from QB – seems sometimes it returns an error # and others it does not. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          If switched to Single user – they may get - XYZ Company – Unknown error returned from QuickBooks… this means QB cannot move the child to a new parent due to history on the child company like payments, invoices, etc.. – (See below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          Additional info to above… can also be reported as Error 819&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          Error adding XYZ 819 – (The object may not be changed). Error adding XYZ  819: There was an error when modifying a Customers list, element &amp;quot;800009F6-1300911661&amp;quot;.  QuickBooks error message: Unknown Error. The Customer List Element is the QuickBooks UID for the customer you have flagged to move in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          To Resolve: Review QuickBooks for the XYZ company and reset the SME companies to match what they were before the ‘Is Billable’ flag was lifted or the Billing/Parent Company was changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Duplicate Customer ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you see the following error in SQLink, there is a duplicate customer in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer : XYZ is skipped due to duplication&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can follow the following steps to resolve the error or watch the video below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;5EC0ZdD3I7I&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Find which customer record is the duplicate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Customers&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Views&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    In the Grid Column Window, check the following fields: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Name, BillName, Address 1, Address 2, City, St, CustID, ParentID, QBExport. Click OK.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#    Arrange the columns the way you want in the search view window.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Views&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Type a name for the view and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    In the search view window, sort by &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Locate the customer name SQLink said is a duplicate.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Follow the row to the CustID column. If the column is empty, that is your duplicate customer record. Double click to open the duplicate.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click your cursor in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field to edit the customer name. Type (&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;DUP&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;) after the customer name. This makes it unique and easy to identify when reassigning orders and invoices for the duplicate customer.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Now that you found which customer is the duplicate record, check to see if there is any activity for customer you need to reassign&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Activity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#    If there is an invoice on this tab, double click on it. SME will jump to the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rollback Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Go back to the duplicate customer.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Activity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab to check to see if there is a service order assocaited with the &amp;quot;DUP&amp;quot; customer. &lt;br /&gt;
#    If there is a serivce order, double click on it. SME will jump to the order.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click [[File:Magnify.jpg]] to search for the correct customer. In the search window, select the correct customer record, not the &amp;quot;(DUP)&amp;quot; record.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Save the service order.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Generate Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to re-invoice the order.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Follow steps 1-9 for install orders and invoices for the install orders.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Now the activity associated with the duplicate customer are assigned to the correct customer, delete the duplicate customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;quot;DUP&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; customer.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to delete the customer record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Link ID not initialized ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you receive the following SQLink error, you were trying to sync an invoice to QuickBooks that didn&amp;#039;t have a valid customer in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice #XXX skipped - Customer link ID not initialized&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is usually caused by duplicate customer records in SME. Click here to watch a video on how to resolve the duplicate customer on an invoice and sync the invoice properly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;5EC0ZdD3I7I&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the video, when the service order was re-invoiced, we let SME assign a new invoice number. If you need to retain the original invoice number, instead of clicking Action&amp;gt; Generate Invoice on the order, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*    Write down the order number that needs to be re-invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
*    Go to the correct customer record (not the DUP customer).&lt;br /&gt;
*    Click Actions&amp;gt; New Combined Invoice. SME will jump to the new invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
*    On the Details and Settings tab, locate the Invoice # field. Click [[File:browse.jpg]] to enter the invoice number you want to use. (If you don’t see this icon, you need to add the permission to initialize numbers to your user group settings)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InvoiceNumberField.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*    Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Install Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab to select the order you need to invoice (the invoice number you wrote down in the first step above).&lt;br /&gt;
*    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Error Connecting to QuickBooks ==&lt;br /&gt;
When syncing SME to QuickBooks, if you receive the message &amp;quot;Error Connecting to QuickBooks&amp;quot;, you are logging into QuickBooks with a path that is different than that refereced by SQLink. This typically happens if you open QuickBooks on a client and try to sync when the initial sync was established on the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run SQLink on client machines, you will need to do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    From the client computer, browse to the sme5 executable folder and locate the SQLink Documentation folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Run the QBFC7_0Installer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, SQLink and QuickBooks must reference the same path to access the QuickBooks company file. to check this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Open QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Press &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;F2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to open the Product Information window.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File Information&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; section and make note of the path in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Launch SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quick Books Company File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.  The path in this field must be the same as the path noted in QuickBooks (step 3 above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== List Element Error ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When running SQLink with QuickBooks the following message is returned in the SQLink Log:&lt;br /&gt;
Error adding (Item Name*) 819: There was an error when modifying a (can be any type of name) list, element** &amp;quot;3170000-1189020798&amp;quot;. QuickBooks error message: Cannot merge list elements.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* An item in QB can be a customer name, vendor name, inventory item, etc…&lt;br /&gt;
** Element “#######-#########” is the QuickBooks unique identifier&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Basically either the ‘Name’ or the ‘Element’ is on a list in QuickBooks and therefore the item that SME is exporting will be rejected by QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For example:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both ListID and the Name are unique keys in QuickBooks. And you modified a customer which prompts to export that Customer with the ListID that matches an existing ListID in QB and the Item Name from another record or the Item Name matches, a more likely scenario, and the ListID is different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This produces the &amp;quot;Cannot merge list elements&amp;quot; error message back from QuickBooks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Customer - CustID&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Invoice - InvoiceID&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Vendor - VendorID&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Inventory - InventoryID&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Service Item - ServiceID&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Employee - EmployeeID&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Usually for all SME modules there will be an item/column with &amp;lt;name&amp;gt;ID which holds the QB list UID.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To include the QuickBooks ID number in the search window:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. In the search window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Views&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add remove fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the window that opens, check the QuickBooks ID field for that module (list above)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Name the field and Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For more information about search views, go to [[Search Window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Example Error:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Error adding Bill10506 &lt;br /&gt;
807: Object &amp;quot;80000016-308248122&amp;quot; specified in the request cannot be found.  QuickBooks error message: Invalid argument.  The specified record does not exist in the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Solution:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers “80000016-308248122” are referring to an inventory item that QB says no longer exists in QB. It may be inactive, deleted, or related to the inactive parent. You can research it as noted above and shown below in the screenshot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InventoryID_SearchView.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To resolve this issue:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.    Examine the SQLink log: Look at the error:&lt;br /&gt;
*        Error adding Customer A 819: There was an error when modifying a Customers list, element &amp;quot;3170000-1189020798&amp;quot;. QuickBooks error message: Cannot merge list elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.    In QuickBooks, locate and edit the name of the vendor/customer:&lt;br /&gt;
*        Choose &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job List&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; List, or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item List, etc&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;… as needs may require.&lt;br /&gt;
*        Locate and double-click the name noted in the SQLink Log.&lt;br /&gt;
*        Place a 1 at the end of the name and click OK. Leave QuickBooks and this list open.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.    In SQLink do &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Data Functions&amp;gt; Export New QuickBooks Data&amp;gt; (List Item)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. In this case it will be Customers. There should be no error for the specific record and it will export to QuickBooks and sit right next to the QuickBooks Record.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.    In QuickBooks, merge the edited name with the name that has been created by the SQLink:&lt;br /&gt;
*        In the open list in QuickBooks, double-click the name to which you added a 1.&lt;br /&gt;
*        Remove the 1 from the name and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*        When asked if you would like to merge the names, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Do this for all items that have the issue from the SME log.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Error - QBFC Not Found ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QBFC_Not_Found.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The QBFC program is local to the logged on user. Download and run the installer from the following link.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;QBFC 11.0: http://high5software.com/downloads/QB/QBFC11_0Installer.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink stops processing in the middle of a sync ==&lt;br /&gt;
If SQLink stops processing in the middle of your sync, you can look at the log file and find out what item is holding up the sync or if there is an error connecting to QuickBooks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Right click on your SQLink shortcut and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;open file location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Double click on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Log&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; folder&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Sort by modified date and locate the file modified last, it will probably be a sqlink file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. Right click, not double click, on the file and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5. Scroll to the bottom of the file and you will see the item that is holding up the sync. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==QB Invoice number has changed ==&lt;br /&gt;
Processing 10 of 110 Invoices (Ref #405-I)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;QB Invoice number has changed : QB = 405-I SMP = 405&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Invoice numbers in SME are numeric only. Invoice numbers in QuickBooks are strings so they can have numbers and letters. When the invoice from QB syncs to SME, the letters will be taken out of the invoice number in SME. Your invoice number in QB isn&amp;#039;t changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Error adding customer XYZ 810: There was an error when saving a customers list, element ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Error adding Custer XYZ   810: There was an error when saving a Customers list, element &amp;quot; Custer XYZ&amp;quot;.  QuickBooks error message: This customer already has job information. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To add a new job, the customer&amp;#039;s current job information must be moved into its own job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Invoice #12345 skipped - Customer is inactive ==&lt;br /&gt;
Adding (X) Invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Processing 1 of (X) invoices (#12345)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Invoice #12345 skipped - Customer is inactive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Retrieve the Invoice and get the customer name. Check the name in both SME and QuickBooks and set the customer as active to export an invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Purchase Order 12345 skipped - no received items to export ==&lt;br /&gt;
Adding Purchase Orders to QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Processing 1 of (X) Purchase Orders&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Purchase Order 12345 skipped - no received items to export&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The ‘Export To QuickBooks’ flag is set when there are no received items to export. There are two flags, QB Bill Export and QB PO Export. Uncheck the flag as it will get set if items are received on the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Payment not distributed ==&lt;br /&gt;
Payment not distributed means that there is no invoice associated with the payment. For a payment to export from SME to QB it has to have an invoice attached. I would do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Delete the payment from the Payments module&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2) Go to Receivables &amp;gt; Invoicing and go to the invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3) Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payments&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and enter the payment&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That way you are assured that it is attached to an invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the invoice in QB you can also apply the payment in QB and it will sync back to SME and close the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== There is no disk in the drive.  Please insert a disk into drive E. ==&lt;br /&gt;
This happens when USB devises are removed without first ejecting the media. This can happen either from USB or DVD/CD devises. You may also need to put a readable DVD or CD in your removable drives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A quick way to stop the error from popping up is to quickly click the &amp;quot;Save to file&amp;quot; button in lower right corner. You can click &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot; on the window that opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;SQLink_SaveToFile.png&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prevent the error from happening in the future:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. First look at the removable USB devises icon next to the system clock.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;    [[File:RemovableDisc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. When you put the mouse over the icon you’ll see the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;    [[File:SafelyRemove.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click on the icon and you will see all USB related devises&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;    [[File:EjectFlash.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Remove all drive related entries that are not currently plugged in. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Place a disk in all DVD/CD drives. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. This should clear up the issue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;More info on the topic:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;http://ccrqblog.ccrsoftware.info/2010/02/stopping-the-windows-no-disk-error/ &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For more dire cases do the following:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Right click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;My Computer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Manage&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click on &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Device Manager&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Disk Drives&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Count how many &amp;quot;Drives&amp;quot; that your computer is currently using.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. When the Error message pops up then count how many &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Drives&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; it&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; On some computers you will see duplicate entries in your device manager. You will need to Disable the duplicates.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DuplicateDiscs.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== QuickBooks warning 550 ==&lt;br /&gt;
999: Unrecognized QuickBooks warning: 550: The Customers object was saved successfully, but its corresponding Notes record could not be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This is a warning / bug from QuickBooks which High5 can&amp;#039;t do anything about. The record should be updated with the sync, but to stop getting the error you must go to the record in QuickBooks and enter any character in the Notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SQLink Error 511 - QBRequestID has been used previously for another request ==&lt;br /&gt;
This message is from QuickBooks. Usually closing and reopening QB will clear the message and reset the request processor. We&amp;#039;ve noticed that the QB ID generator sometimes gets stuck, and when it does, this is the outcome. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Error511_QBRequestID.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To resolve, close QuickBooks and reopen. This should reset the QuickBooks ID generation&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Warehouse_Manager_for_SME&amp;diff=5304</id>
		<title>Warehouse Manager for SME</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Warehouse_Manager_for_SME&amp;diff=5304"/>
		<updated>2014-06-26T16:14:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Notice:  Barcode for SME is changing to a browser based application along with a usb or bluetooth barcode device called &amp;quot;Warehouse Manager for SME&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
The old Barcode for SME using the MT2000 is being discontinued as of October 2013.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Warehouse Manager for SME ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse Manager for SME utilizes a browser device along with any usb or bluetooth barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
Website for this product is located at http://m.high5software.com/barcode.html&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to establish an account and login through SME Master at http://m.high5software.com/SMEMaster, then select applications&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Manager for SME is compatible with SME7.2 or SME8 although we recommend SME8 for best performance.&lt;br /&gt;
===Barcode Device for Warehouse Manager for SME===&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Manager for SME will technically work with any usb or bluetooth connected barcode.  However, it&amp;#039;s not possible for High 5 Software to test every device so we recommend you select a barcode that is compatible with your browser device (smartphone, tablet, laptop, or PC).&lt;br /&gt;
High5 has tested with the following devices:&lt;br /&gt;
* Socket mobile: http://ww1.socketmobile.com/products/bluetooth-scanners/how-to-buy/details.aspx?sku=CX2864-1336&lt;br /&gt;
* Motorola: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/US-EN/Product+Lines/Symbol/Symbol+Bar+Code+Scanners/Motorola+CS3000+Series_US-EN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Although some consumer applications are able to use a smartphone camera as a barcode device, we believe that the camera is not fast enough for industrial applications.  Therefore, you need a separate barcode dedicated barcode device for scanning.  These devices are tuned for speed and use fast laser or image scanning.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: RFID devices should also work, however have not yet been tested.&lt;br /&gt;
If you acquire a barcode or RFID device that is able to connect to your browser device (smartphone) but is not working properly with Warehouse Manager for SME, please contact support@h5sw.com and we will investigate.&lt;br /&gt;
===Browser Device for Barcode===&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Manager for SME will work with any modern browser except that we do NOT support IE-Internet Explorer because Microsoft does not follow standard internet protocols and constantly changes the browser making it not work properly.  Instead we recommend Chrome, Firefox or Safari on IOS devices.&lt;br /&gt;
This means that the Warehouse Manager will work on a SmartPhone, Tablet, Laptop or PC.  It&amp;#039;s VERY flexible.&lt;br /&gt;
The browser device is used as the screen and the connected barcode device is used for the scanning of the barcodes or RFIDs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Licensing and Pricing==&lt;br /&gt;
Pricing of Warehouse Manager for SME is $40 per named user per month or $995 plus $199 per year support.&lt;br /&gt;
This does not include the barcode nor the browser device as you would acquire that separately based on your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
Contact sales@high5software.com to activate your licenses.&lt;br /&gt;
==Functions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Receive PO&amp;#039;s===&lt;br /&gt;
To receive purchase orders click the drop down menu at the top of the bar code application and click &amp;quot;Receive Mode&amp;quot;. Now you&amp;#039;re ready to scan in items that were purchased and shipped to the warehouse to replenish your inventory. The workflow, starting from generating a purchase order, might look something like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create A Purchase Order====&lt;br /&gt;
Note: For a comprehensive guide to purchase orders in SME please see [[Purchase Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You noticed you&amp;#039;re running low on some items so you go into SME to create a purchase order to replenish your stock and buy some new items from your supplier. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Purchase Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in Inventory Module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The vendor information will populate the Vendor tab on Details and Settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Fill out the rest of the fields on Details and Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PO_DetailsAndSettings.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  PO #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This number will be auto-populated by SME.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reference #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - this field will be populated with the PO#. You can edit this field as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Date you created the PO&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Due Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select the date the parts are due in. You can sort by this field in the search window to manage your purchase orders.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click Customer to add the customer name to the PO. You can sort by this field in the search window.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Taken By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The SME user that created the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Requested By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – You can select the SME user that requested the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Approved By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select the SME user that approved the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
*   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PO Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – You can customize this field to reflect the milestones each PO goes through (e.g. ready for approval, approved, sent to vendor, received). You can sort by this field in the search window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Items from Service, Add Items from Install or Add Items from Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. The Search window will open with all Service, Install or Invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Double click on an order and the materials on the order will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ViewItemsOnOrder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Double click on the material you want to add to the purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8. Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PO Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. Notice the material selected listed here.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9. Repeat steps 4-7 to add additional materials on order to the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Shipping Notes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add shipping notes to the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Find the PO in the Bar Code Application====&lt;br /&gt;
The next step is to find the PO that was just created in SME in the bar code application. Let&amp;#039;s say we purchased a &amp;quot;Telecare Package&amp;quot; consisting of a few different items for one of our technicians and had the items shipped to &amp;quot;Bob&amp;#039;s Van&amp;quot;. Bob needs to use the bar code application to scan these items into the system and verify that he has received them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Start at the home page for the bar code application http://m.high5software.com/Tech/Barcode.html&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose &amp;quot;Receive Mode&amp;quot; from the drop down menu at the top of the page&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the location where the PO items are being shipped to.&lt;br /&gt;
#A list of all of the purchase orders for that location will be shown. Select the PO you want to receive. There it is! PO number 104 from our favorite vendor, Dave&amp;#039;s Dainty Dress Shop. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Receive Mode PO List.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Receive PO====&lt;br /&gt;
Now let&amp;#039;s scan the items associated with the purchase order into SME&amp;#039;s inventory system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click on your PO to view the items that were shipped to that location&lt;br /&gt;
*Each item on the list will display the quantity remaining to be scanned (e.g. 0 of 1.0000 means that you&amp;#039;ve already scanned the single item of that type that was included in the PO. 1.0000 of 3.0000 means there is one item that still needs to be scanned, out of the three items of that type that were shipped)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Receive Mode Item List.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Scan the bar code of the item you want to identify as received (or type the Item Number into the text field and press Enter)&lt;br /&gt;
*If the item is not a serial part then it will immediately be received&lt;br /&gt;
*If the item IS a serial part you will type the item number, press enter, then type a unique serial number and press enter again&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Continue scanning until all of the items are received and the quantities remaining are all zero&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Confirm PO Actions in SME====&lt;br /&gt;
Now go back to SME into the Inventory module, to the Purchase Order category. Find the purchase order you just received and confirm that it is marked as received. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SME Receive Mode Confirmation.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pick Parts for Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Pick Mode&amp;quot; in the Warehouse Manager bar code application allows the user to pick and reserve parts for specific customer orders, and then move those selected parts to another location if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Pick Mode in the top drop down&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the warehouse location where you want to Pick From and Pick To.  &lt;br /&gt;
## If you are just reserving parts for an order, select the current or main warehouse where the parts are and the picking will reserve those parts for the order selected.&lt;br /&gt;
## If you want to reserve AND move, select the warehouse you want to move to for example to a tech warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the order you are picking for.  You can use barcode to select the order if you have a barcode for the order number&lt;br /&gt;
# Barcode the part or serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
## The application will look for barcode in the part number, manufacturing part number, or any of the vendor part numbers for associated vendor parts for a specific part (alternate parts in SME&amp;gt;Inventory&amp;gt;Vendors tab).&lt;br /&gt;
## If the part is serialized, barcode the serial number next.&lt;br /&gt;
## If the part is not serialized it will pick the part for this order.&lt;br /&gt;
# Pick Messages:&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;quot;No Stock Available&amp;quot;  If SME does not have any stock, you will get &amp;quot;No Stock Available&amp;quot; and will need to resolve the stock quantities in SME for example maybe the part has not been received or was already selected for another order.&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;quot;Fully Picked&amp;quot;  If all the parts are already picked for that part a message will show &amp;quot;Fully Picked&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;quot;Did not receive&amp;quot;  Error code -8.  Was unable to select the part for various reasons.  Check in SME to determine why that part is not selectable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Transfer Parts between Warehouses===&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer mode is intended to be used when moving inventory between warehouses. For example, Bob the technician notices that he is running low on the stock of routers that he keeps in his van and gets some more. To keep track of where the company&amp;#039;s assets are Bob would scan those items using Transfer Mode when he takes them from the warehouse and puts them in his van. Let&amp;#039;s go through the steps he would follow: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Transfer Mode&amp;quot; at the top of the bar code application&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the location that you are transferring inventory FROM in the large &amp;quot;Location&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose the location that you are transferring inventory TO in the smaller &amp;quot;To&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the quantity of a specific type of item you&amp;#039;d like to transfer&lt;br /&gt;
# Scan the bar code (or type in the Item Number and press Enter)&lt;br /&gt;
# A confirmation message is displayed and you can verify that those items were transferred to the new location&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== OLD Barcode for SME ==&lt;br /&gt;
THIS PRODUCT IS DISCONTINUED AS OF OCTOBER 2013!&lt;br /&gt;
Old Barcode for SME is using the Motorola MT2000 with built-in software. This product is being discontinued as of October 2013 and will no longer be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Device Recommendations ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Motorola/Symbol MT2000 series is the only device that works with Barcode for SME.  You will need the WiFi capability rather than just BlueTooth for greater range throughout the warehouse, so we recommend the MT2090 version.  Most barcodes are 1D so you could go with the SR Laser which only supports 1D barcodes, however the trend is towards 2D barcodes and to future-proof your device, we recommend a 2D imager rather than just the 1D laser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specific Device Recommendation for barcode with 2D imager and WiFi, these are kits that include the charger:&lt;br /&gt;
* For 2D standard image recognition (this will work for most applications)&lt;br /&gt;
** US: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-sl2000c1us.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 SR Imager 2D US Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
** Worldwide: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-sd2000c1ww.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 SR Imager 2D WW Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
* For High Density image recognition (this will give greatest flexibility for label scanning, usually slightly higher price):&lt;br /&gt;
** US: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-hd2000c1us.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 HD Imager 2D US Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
**Worldwide: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-hd2000c1ww.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 HD Imager 2D WW Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Login ==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use the device a user must login. These credentials will be used to access the SME database, and for settings in various other functions. A “live” connection does not need to be present in order to login. However the device requires login to operate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;User Login&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Upon each use of the SME Barcode the device will require the user to login. It will attempt to check the credentials through SME and return whether they were valid. If they are not valid, OR a disconnected state is desired select OK. Otherwise Select Retry to re-enter user credentials. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When the user is ready to close the application Selecting Close instead of log-out will allow the application to be ran again using the same user Login Credentials as previous. A Logout would allow a new user to login.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Initial Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two main portions to setup the device, both will be automatically presented upon initial use, and can be accessed later through the menu. First is obtaining the web service url for use on the device. The other is choosing the default location of the device. [Print Setup will be covered in a different section]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Obtaining the Web Service URL&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* The Web service Setup screen will be the first screen presented upon initial use. &lt;br /&gt;
* This requires a “Live” connection, but can be bypassed by pressing the Menu button and selecting Home. This will bypass login and run in a disconnected state.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the correct information and press Login. The URL will be obtained and stored within the device.&lt;br /&gt;
* Should the URL need to be changed for any reason, press the Menu button from the Login Screen and select Setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Choosing a Location for the device&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* The device location will be the second screen that appears upon initial use. &lt;br /&gt;
* This requires a Live Connection; if a live connection doesn’t exist this function is not available. However once it has been set it will remain in the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Receiving Purchase Order Items ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PO Receive is a “Live Only” feature, meaning there must be any active internet connection, allowing the device to update the SME database in “real-time”. PO Receive will allow the user to navigate through a listing of Open Purchase Orders selecting the desired PO by keypad or by scanning a barcode associated with the PO Number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Selecting a Purchase Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main menu, scroll using the direction pad until PO Receive is highlighted. Select using either ENT or the OK Button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A purchase order can be selected by one of the following ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scroll to the Order desired; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Type in the Order Number in the box; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scanning a barcode relating to the Order Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Receiving Items on a Purchase Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Listed next are all the material items for the Order. Once an item is selected or scanned (same as above) a screen will appear based on whether the item is serialized or non-serialized&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow serial numbers to be entered by keypad or scanning the S/N barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Multiple S/N can be scanned per item until need is met, the user presses the save button or scans another Order Item Barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* If an incorrect barcode is scanned into the S/N screen press the edit button and choose delete. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For non-serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow the user to enter the total quantity to be received or scan barcodes until all items have been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once all items have been received the order will be closed unless it contains un-received service or package items. If so a message will display indicating this to be true and a count of each.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding New Manufacture/Vendor Part Numbers&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should a vendor change the barcode for an item, the device will allow adding a new barcode associated with the item. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you scan an item if the device does not recognize the item, it will prompt whether you would like to add the barcode to an item on the order. Pressing yes will bring up a list of items on the order. Simply choose the correct item and press ENT. The new association will be added to SME and receiving can continue as before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reserving Items for a Customer Order  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reserve Items is a “Live Only” feature, meaning there must be any active internet connection, allowing the device to update the SME database in “real-time”. Reserve Items will allow the user to navigate through a listing of Open Customer Orders selecting the desired Customer Order by keypad or by scanning a barcode associated with the Order Number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Selecting a Customer Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From the main menu scroll up or down using the direction pad until &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reserve Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is highlighted selecting it using either the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; key or the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ok&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
Listed in ascending order are all the open Customer orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A Customer order can be selected by one of the following ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scroll to the Order desired; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Type in the Order Number in the box; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scanning a barcode relating to the Order Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Reserving Items on an Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Listed next is all the material items for the Order&lt;br /&gt;
Once an item is selected or scanned (same as above) a screen will appear based on whether the item is serialized or non-serialized&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow serial numbers to be entered by keypad or scanning the S/N barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Multiple S/N can be scanned per item until need is met, the user presses the save button or scans another Item Barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* If the item is reserved for another order a window will appear indicating this item cannot be used and another must be chosen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For non-serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow the user to enter the total quantity to be reserved or scan barcodes until the total needed or available has been reached&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Transferring a Customer Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once items for an order have been reserved, they can be transferred from one location to another. Note that only reserved items can be transferred and all items get transferred at once. The items will remain reserved but will be listed in the new location. Should you like to transfer available items please see Inventory Transfer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* From the order items screen press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MENU&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button, highlight &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and press &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Highlight the location you would like to transfer to and press &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Auditing Customer Equipment ==&lt;br /&gt;
Audit Customer Equipment is a function that will work regardless of connection status. However various features will be unavailable when there isn’t a “Live” connection. Audit Customer Equipment will allow equipment to be scanned and either a count (non-serialized) or serial number to be assigned. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;An Audit file is automatically stored under \Applications\SME Barcode\Equipment and can be retrieved by plugging the device into a Windows PC and navigating the folders on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. From the main menu scroll up or down using the direction pad until Audit Equipment is highlighted. Select it using either the ENT key or the OK Button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. A screen well appear with the default filename use to store the Audit information. Default file is: TechID_Date_’incremental counter’ e.g. 6443_05_01_2011_003 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Pressing Begin will advance you to the next screen allowing Audit to begin. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Pressing the ENT key will display a Save AS… screen allowing a custom file name to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. The Location Screen appears allowing a new Location to be Entered, Scanned, or Chosen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  * To find a location to choose press Find button&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  * Highlight the desired location and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  * Press NEXT to continue to the Audit Screen&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. The Audit screen appears to begin scanning barcodes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Once a barcode has been scanned a new screen will appear allowing a quantity to be entered or a serial number to be assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8. The screen will Display the location at the top with a listing of Item Scanned and either the qty or the S/N associated.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9. Pressing NEXT will allow a new Location to be selected. NOTE: Only items after a location change will reflect the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Non-Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Enter a quantity using the keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Continue scanning equipment with the same barcode or the same barcode until the desired count is met. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Press Save button to add this information to the audit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: DO NOT SCAN A DIFFERENT BARCODE- this will enter that barcode as the associated S/N for that item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scan a S/N&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This will return the application back to the Main Audit screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Should an incorrect item and/or S/N be scanned, the item can be deleted by pressing the ENT key and then OK to confirm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Sending, Printing, Saving&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Send to SME and Print are “Live Connection” only functions. They will not work if there is not a live connection. However the audit file will be saved regardless of the connection status. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Save is an Automatic function that happens whether you select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Back&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Menu-Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.Menu-Save can also be selected which will save the audit and remain on this screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Print will print the audit to any printer connected to the network the web service is on. To print press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Menu&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button, navigate to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; key&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This function requires setup. Please see the Setting up a Printer section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Send will insert the audit information into SME for later processing. To send the audit to SME, press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Menu&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button, navigate to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send,&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Material Stock ==&lt;br /&gt;
Inventory Stock is a function that will work regardless of connection status. However various features will be unavailable when there isn’t a “Live” connection. Inventory Stock will allow material items to be scanned and either a count (non-serialized) or serial number to be assigned. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;An inventory file is automatically stored under \Applications\SME Barcode\Inventory and can be retrieved by plugging the device into a Windows PC and navigating the folders on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Inventory Material Stock&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#From the main menu scroll up or down using the direction pad until Inventory Stock is highlighted. Select it using either the ENT key or the OK Button.&lt;br /&gt;
#A screen well appear with the default filename use to store the Inventory information. Default file is: TechID_Date_’incremental counter’ e.g. 6443_05_01_2011_003 &lt;br /&gt;
#Pressing Begin will advance you to the next screen allowing Inventory to begin. &lt;br /&gt;
#Pressing the ENT key will display a Save AS… screen allowing a custom file name to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The Inventory screen appears to begin scanning barcodes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once a barcode has been scanned a new screen will appear allowing a quantity to be entered or a serial number to be assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The screen will display the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;shelf&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;bin&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, at the top along with a listing of item scanned and either the qty or the S/N associated.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pressing NEXT will allow a new Location/shelf/bin to be selected. NOTE: Only items after a this change will reflect the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Non-Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Enter a quantity using the keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Continue scanning items with the same barcode or the same barcode until the desired count is met. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Press Save button to add this information to the Inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; DO NOT SCAN A DIFFERENT BARCODE- this will enter that barcode as the associated S/N for that item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Scan a S/N&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*This will return the application back to the Main Inventory screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Should an incorrect item and/or S/N be scanned, the item can be deleted by pressing the ENT key and then OK to confirm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Sending, Printing, Saving&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send to SME, and Print, are “Live Connection” only functions. They will not work if there is not a live connection. However the audit file will be saved regardless of the connection status. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Save is an Automatic function that happens whether you select Menu-Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Print will print the audit to any printer connected to the network the web service is on. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To print press the Menu button, navigate to Print and press the ENT key&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This function requires setup. Please see the Setting up a Printer section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Send will insert the audit information into SME for later processing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To send the audit to SME, press the menu button, navigate to Send, and press the ENT key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Transfer ==&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer Inventory is a “Live Only” feature, meaning there must be any active internet connection, allowing the device to update the SME database in “real-time”. Transfer Inventory will allow the user to select from a listing of open transfer orders or create a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Initializing a transfer&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From the main transfer screen a new transfer order can be created or an existing open transfer order can be enacted.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For a new Transfer Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*The device automatically Selects From as the location the device is in&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Highlight To and press ENT, highlight the desired location and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Select whether to Deplete stock or not &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Press Begin&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For an existing Transfer order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Highlight Transfer Order # and press ENT, highlight the order desired and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Press Begin&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding Items&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scan any item to add it to the transfer; however only available items at the correct location can be added to a transfer order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once an item has been scanned one of the following will happen based on inventory type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For serialized&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow serial numbers to be entered by keypad or scanning the S/N barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Multiple S/N can be scanned per item until need is met, the user presses the save button or scans another Order Item Barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* If an incorrect barcode is scanned into the S/N screen press the edit button and choose delete. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For non-Serialized&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow the user to enter the total quantity to be received or scan barcodes until all items have been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Switching Views&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function is really only applicable for transfers which began in SME. This allows you to view the items that have been placed on a transfer but don’t have items selected yet. Requested quantities will deplete as items are scanned for transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Press MENU highlight Switch View and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Closing a Transfer&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once all items desired have been added to a transfer order the order can be closed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Press MENU highlight Close Transfer and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
Print is a function that will allow the user to print certain things from the Hand-held terminal. However setup must be performed prior to use from a Windows PC with the device connected and active Sync installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to setup print, several pre-conditions must be met first:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*A printer must be connected to the same network as the web service&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*The web service server must have the printer installed (Drivers etc)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*The user of the device must have an account on the server with which to print from, &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*A “print” account should be set-up on the server granting restricted print access. (Recommended)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once the pre-conditions have been met, Follow the following steps as directed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Connect the device to a Windows PC with Active sync installed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Open the device through Windows Explorer and navigate to ‘\Applications\SME Barcode’&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Copy the file Settings.XML to your desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Right-Click the file on your desktop and select Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Edit the following lines:&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;PrinterPath&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;Domain&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The form should look something like this:   &lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;PrinterPath&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;\\BUFFETT\HP Photosmart D5100 series&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;Domain&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;HIGH5SOFTWARE&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Save the file&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Move the File back to the device ‘\Applications\SME Barcode’ selecting Move Replace.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Warehouse_Manager_for_SME&amp;diff=5303</id>
		<title>Warehouse Manager for SME</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Warehouse_Manager_for_SME&amp;diff=5303"/>
		<updated>2014-06-25T22:00:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: Created page with &amp;quot;Notice:  Barcode for SME is changing to a browser based application along with a usb or bluetooth barcode device called &amp;quot;Warehouse Manager for SME&amp;quot;. The old Barcode for SME using...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Notice:  Barcode for SME is changing to a browser based application along with a usb or bluetooth barcode device called &amp;quot;Warehouse Manager for SME&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
The old Barcode for SME using the MT2000 is being discontinued as of October 2013.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Warehouse Manager for SME ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse Manager for SME utilizes a browser device along with any usb or bluetooth barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
Website for this product is located at http://m.high5software.com/barcode.html&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to establish an account and login through SME Master at http://m.high5software.com/SMEMaster, then select applications&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Manager for SME is compatible with SME7.2 or SME8 although we recommend SME8 for best performance.&lt;br /&gt;
===Barcode Device for Warehouse Manager for SME===&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Manager for SME will technically work with any usb or bluetooth connected barcode.  However, it&amp;#039;s not possible for High 5 Software to test every device so we recommend you select a barcode that is compatible with your browser device (smartphone, tablet, laptop, or PC).&lt;br /&gt;
High5 has tested with the following devices:&lt;br /&gt;
* Socket mobile: http://ww1.socketmobile.com/products/bluetooth-scanners/how-to-buy/details.aspx?sku=CX2864-1336&lt;br /&gt;
* Motorola: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/US-EN/Product+Lines/Symbol/Symbol+Bar+Code+Scanners/Motorola+CS3000+Series_US-EN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Although some consumer applications are able to use a smartphone camera as a barcode device, we believe that the camera is not fast enough for industrial applications.  Therefore, you need a separate barcode dedicated barcode device for scanning.  These devices are tuned for speed and use fast laser or image scanning.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: RFID devices should also work, however have not yet been tested.&lt;br /&gt;
If you acquire a barcode or RFID device that is able to connect to your browser device (smartphone) but is not working properly with Warehouse Manager for SME, please contact support@h5sw.com and we will investigate.&lt;br /&gt;
===Browser Device for Barcode===&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Manager for SME will work with any modern browser except that we do NOT support IE-Internet Explorer because Microsoft does not follow standard internet protocols and constantly changes the browser making it not work properly.  Instead we recommend Chrome, Firefox or Safari on IOS devices.&lt;br /&gt;
This means that the Warehouse Manager will work on a SmartPhone, Tablet, Laptop or PC.  It&amp;#039;s VERY flexible.&lt;br /&gt;
The browser device is used as the screen and the connected barcode device is used for the scanning of the barcodes or RFIDs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Licensing and Pricing==&lt;br /&gt;
Pricing of Warehouse Manager for SME is $40 per named user per month or $995 plus $199 per year support.&lt;br /&gt;
This does not include the barcode nor the browser device as you would acquire that separately based on your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
Contact sales@high5software.com to activate your licenses.&lt;br /&gt;
==Functions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Receive PO&amp;#039;s===&lt;br /&gt;
To receive purchase orders click the drop down menu at the top of the bar code application and click &amp;quot;Receive Mode&amp;quot;. Now you&amp;#039;re ready to scan in items that were purchased and shipped to the warehouse to replenish your inventory. The workflow, starting from generating a purchase order, might look something like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create A Purchase Order====&lt;br /&gt;
Note: For a comprehensive guide to purchase orders in SME please see [[Purchase Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You noticed you&amp;#039;re running low on some items so you go into SME to create a purchase order to replenish your stock and buy some new items from your supplier. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Purchase Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in Inventory Module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The vendor information will populate the Vendor tab on Details and Settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Fill out the rest of the fields on Details and Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PO_DetailsAndSettings.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  PO #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This number will be auto-populated by SME.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reference #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - this field will be populated with the PO#. You can edit this field as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Date you created the PO&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Due Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select the date the parts are due in. You can sort by this field in the search window to manage your purchase orders.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click Customer to add the customer name to the PO. You can sort by this field in the search window.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Taken By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The SME user that created the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Requested By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – You can select the SME user that requested the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Approved By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select the SME user that approved the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
*   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PO Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – You can customize this field to reflect the milestones each PO goes through (e.g. ready for approval, approved, sent to vendor, received). You can sort by this field in the search window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Items from Service, Add Items from Install or Add Items from Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. The Search window will open with all Service, Install or Invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Double click on an order and the materials on the order will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ViewItemsOnOrder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Double click on the material you want to add to the purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8. Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PO Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. Notice the material selected listed here.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9. Repeat steps 4-7 to add additional materials on order to the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Shipping Notes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add shipping notes to the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Find the PO in the Bar Code Application====&lt;br /&gt;
The next step is to find the PO that was just created in SME in the bar code application. Let&amp;#039;s say we purchased a &amp;quot;Telecare Package&amp;quot; consisting of a few different items for one of our technicians and had the items shipped to &amp;quot;Bob&amp;#039;s Van&amp;quot;. Bob needs to use the bar code application to scan these items into the system and verify that he has received them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Start at the home page for the bar code application http://m.high5software.com/Tech/Barcode.html&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose &amp;quot;Receive Mode&amp;quot; from the drop down menu at the top of the page&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the location where the PO items are being shipped to.&lt;br /&gt;
#A list of all of the purchase orders for that location will be shown. Select the PO you want to receive. There it is! PO number 104 from our favorite vendor, Dave&amp;#039;s Dainty Dress Shop. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Receive Mode PO List.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Receive PO====&lt;br /&gt;
Now let&amp;#039;s scan the items associated with the purchase order into SME&amp;#039;s inventory system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click on your PO to view the items that were shipped to that location&lt;br /&gt;
*Each item on the list will display the quantity remaining to be scanned (e.g. 0 of 1.0000 means that you&amp;#039;ve already scanned the single item of that type that was included in the PO. 1.0000 of 3.0000 means there is one item that still needs to be scanned, out of the three items of that type that were shipped)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Receive Mode Item List.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Scan the bar code of the item you want to identify as received (or type the Item Number into the text field and press Enter)&lt;br /&gt;
*If the item is not a serial part then it will immediately be received&lt;br /&gt;
*If the item IS a serial part you will type the item number, press enter, then type a unique serial number and press enter again&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Continue scanning until all of the items are received and the quantities remaining are all zero&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Confirm PO Actions in SME====&lt;br /&gt;
Now go back to SME into the Inventory module, to the Purchase Order category. Find the purchase order you just received and confirm that it is marked as received. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SME Receive Mode Confirmation.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pick Parts for Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Pick Mode&amp;quot; in the Warehouse Manager bar code application allows the user to pick and reserve parts for specific customer orders, and then move those selected parts to another location if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Pick Mode in the top drop down&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the warehouse location where you want to Pick From and Pick To.  &lt;br /&gt;
## If you are just reserving parts for an order, select the current or main warehouse where the parts are and the picking will reserve those parts for the order selected.&lt;br /&gt;
## If you want to reserve AND move, select the warehouse you want to move to for example to a tech warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the order you are picking for.  You can use barcode to select the order if you have a barcode for the order number&lt;br /&gt;
# Barcode the part or serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
## The application will look for barcode in the part number, manufacturing part number, or any of the vendor part numbers for associated vendor parts for a specific part (alternate parts in SME&amp;gt;Inventory&amp;gt;Vendors tab).&lt;br /&gt;
## If the part is serialized, barcode the serial number next.&lt;br /&gt;
## If the part is not serialized it will pick the part for this order.&lt;br /&gt;
# Pick Messages:&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;quot;No Stock Available&amp;quot;  If SME does not have any stock, you will get &amp;quot;No Stock Available&amp;quot; and will need to resolve the stock quantities in SME for example maybe the part has not been received or was already selected for another order.&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;quot;Fully Picked&amp;quot;  If all the parts are already picked for that part a message will show &amp;quot;Fully Picked&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;quot;Did not receive&amp;quot;  Error code -8.  Was unable to select the part for various reasons.  Check in SME to determine why that part is not selectable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Transfer Parts between Warehouses===&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer mode is intended to be used when moving inventory between warehouses. For example, Bob the technician notices that he is running low on the stock of routers that he keeps in his van and gets some more. To keep track of where the company&amp;#039;s assets are Bob would scan those items using Transfer Mode when he takes them from the warehouse and puts them in his van. Let&amp;#039;s go through the steps he would follow: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Transfer Mode&amp;quot; at the top of the bar code application&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the location that you are transferring inventory FROM in the large &amp;quot;Location&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose the location that you are transferring inventory TO in the smaller &amp;quot;To&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the quantity of a specific type of item you&amp;#039;d like to transfer&lt;br /&gt;
# Scan the bar code (or type in the Item Number and press Enter)&lt;br /&gt;
# A confirmation message is displayed and you can verify that those items were transferred to the new location&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  ==&lt;br /&gt;
==  ==&lt;br /&gt;
== OLD Barcode for SME ==&lt;br /&gt;
THIS PRODUCT IS DISCONTINUED AS OF OCTOBER 2013!&lt;br /&gt;
Old Barcode for SME is using the Motorola MT2000 with built-in software. This product is being discontinued as of October 2013 and will no longer be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Device Recommendations ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Motorola/Symbol MT2000 series is the only device that works with Barcode for SME.  You will need the WiFi capability rather than just BlueTooth for greater range throughout the warehouse, so we recommend the MT2090 version.  Most barcodes are 1D so you could go with the SR Laser which only supports 1D barcodes, however the trend is towards 2D barcodes and to future-proof your device, we recommend a 2D imager rather than just the 1D laser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specific Device Recommendation for barcode with 2D imager and WiFi, these are kits that include the charger:&lt;br /&gt;
* For 2D standard image recognition (this will work for most applications)&lt;br /&gt;
** US: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-sl2000c1us.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 SR Imager 2D US Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
** Worldwide: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-sd2000c1ww.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 SR Imager 2D WW Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
* For High Density image recognition (this will give greatest flexibility for label scanning, usually slightly higher price):&lt;br /&gt;
** US: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-hd2000c1us.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 HD Imager 2D US Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
**Worldwide: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-hd2000c1ww.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 HD Imager 2D WW Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Login ==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use the device a user must login. These credentials will be used to access the SME database, and for settings in various other functions. A “live” connection does not need to be present in order to login. However the device requires login to operate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;User Login&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Upon each use of the SME Barcode the device will require the user to login. It will attempt to check the credentials through SME and return whether they were valid. If they are not valid, OR a disconnected state is desired select OK. Otherwise Select Retry to re-enter user credentials. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When the user is ready to close the application Selecting Close instead of log-out will allow the application to be ran again using the same user Login Credentials as previous. A Logout would allow a new user to login.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Initial Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two main portions to setup the device, both will be automatically presented upon initial use, and can be accessed later through the menu. First is obtaining the web service url for use on the device. The other is choosing the default location of the device. [Print Setup will be covered in a different section]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Obtaining the Web Service URL&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* The Web service Setup screen will be the first screen presented upon initial use. &lt;br /&gt;
* This requires a “Live” connection, but can be bypassed by pressing the Menu button and selecting Home. This will bypass login and run in a disconnected state.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the correct information and press Login. The URL will be obtained and stored within the device.&lt;br /&gt;
* Should the URL need to be changed for any reason, press the Menu button from the Login Screen and select Setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Choosing a Location for the device&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* The device location will be the second screen that appears upon initial use. &lt;br /&gt;
* This requires a Live Connection; if a live connection doesn’t exist this function is not available. However once it has been set it will remain in the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Receiving Purchase Order Items ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PO Receive is a “Live Only” feature, meaning there must be any active internet connection, allowing the device to update the SME database in “real-time”. PO Receive will allow the user to navigate through a listing of Open Purchase Orders selecting the desired PO by keypad or by scanning a barcode associated with the PO Number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Selecting a Purchase Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main menu, scroll using the direction pad until PO Receive is highlighted. Select using either ENT or the OK Button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A purchase order can be selected by one of the following ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scroll to the Order desired; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Type in the Order Number in the box; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scanning a barcode relating to the Order Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Receiving Items on a Purchase Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Listed next are all the material items for the Order. Once an item is selected or scanned (same as above) a screen will appear based on whether the item is serialized or non-serialized&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow serial numbers to be entered by keypad or scanning the S/N barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Multiple S/N can be scanned per item until need is met, the user presses the save button or scans another Order Item Barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* If an incorrect barcode is scanned into the S/N screen press the edit button and choose delete. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For non-serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow the user to enter the total quantity to be received or scan barcodes until all items have been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once all items have been received the order will be closed unless it contains un-received service or package items. If so a message will display indicating this to be true and a count of each.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding New Manufacture/Vendor Part Numbers&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should a vendor change the barcode for an item, the device will allow adding a new barcode associated with the item. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you scan an item if the device does not recognize the item, it will prompt whether you would like to add the barcode to an item on the order. Pressing yes will bring up a list of items on the order. Simply choose the correct item and press ENT. The new association will be added to SME and receiving can continue as before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reserving Items for a Customer Order  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reserve Items is a “Live Only” feature, meaning there must be any active internet connection, allowing the device to update the SME database in “real-time”. Reserve Items will allow the user to navigate through a listing of Open Customer Orders selecting the desired Customer Order by keypad or by scanning a barcode associated with the Order Number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Selecting a Customer Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From the main menu scroll up or down using the direction pad until &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reserve Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is highlighted selecting it using either the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; key or the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ok&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
Listed in ascending order are all the open Customer orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A Customer order can be selected by one of the following ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scroll to the Order desired; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Type in the Order Number in the box; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scanning a barcode relating to the Order Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Reserving Items on an Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Listed next is all the material items for the Order&lt;br /&gt;
Once an item is selected or scanned (same as above) a screen will appear based on whether the item is serialized or non-serialized&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow serial numbers to be entered by keypad or scanning the S/N barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Multiple S/N can be scanned per item until need is met, the user presses the save button or scans another Item Barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* If the item is reserved for another order a window will appear indicating this item cannot be used and another must be chosen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For non-serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow the user to enter the total quantity to be reserved or scan barcodes until the total needed or available has been reached&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Transferring a Customer Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once items for an order have been reserved, they can be transferred from one location to another. Note that only reserved items can be transferred and all items get transferred at once. The items will remain reserved but will be listed in the new location. Should you like to transfer available items please see Inventory Transfer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* From the order items screen press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MENU&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button, highlight &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and press &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Highlight the location you would like to transfer to and press &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Auditing Customer Equipment ==&lt;br /&gt;
Audit Customer Equipment is a function that will work regardless of connection status. However various features will be unavailable when there isn’t a “Live” connection. Audit Customer Equipment will allow equipment to be scanned and either a count (non-serialized) or serial number to be assigned. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;An Audit file is automatically stored under \Applications\SME Barcode\Equipment and can be retrieved by plugging the device into a Windows PC and navigating the folders on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. From the main menu scroll up or down using the direction pad until Audit Equipment is highlighted. Select it using either the ENT key or the OK Button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. A screen well appear with the default filename use to store the Audit information. Default file is: TechID_Date_’incremental counter’ e.g. 6443_05_01_2011_003 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Pressing Begin will advance you to the next screen allowing Audit to begin. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Pressing the ENT key will display a Save AS… screen allowing a custom file name to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. The Location Screen appears allowing a new Location to be Entered, Scanned, or Chosen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  * To find a location to choose press Find button&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  * Highlight the desired location and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  * Press NEXT to continue to the Audit Screen&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. The Audit screen appears to begin scanning barcodes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Once a barcode has been scanned a new screen will appear allowing a quantity to be entered or a serial number to be assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8. The screen will Display the location at the top with a listing of Item Scanned and either the qty or the S/N associated.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9. Pressing NEXT will allow a new Location to be selected. NOTE: Only items after a location change will reflect the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Non-Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Enter a quantity using the keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Continue scanning equipment with the same barcode or the same barcode until the desired count is met. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Press Save button to add this information to the audit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: DO NOT SCAN A DIFFERENT BARCODE- this will enter that barcode as the associated S/N for that item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scan a S/N&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This will return the application back to the Main Audit screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Should an incorrect item and/or S/N be scanned, the item can be deleted by pressing the ENT key and then OK to confirm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Sending, Printing, Saving&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Send to SME and Print are “Live Connection” only functions. They will not work if there is not a live connection. However the audit file will be saved regardless of the connection status. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Save is an Automatic function that happens whether you select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Back&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Menu-Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.Menu-Save can also be selected which will save the audit and remain on this screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Print will print the audit to any printer connected to the network the web service is on. To print press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Menu&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button, navigate to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; key&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This function requires setup. Please see the Setting up a Printer section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Send will insert the audit information into SME for later processing. To send the audit to SME, press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Menu&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button, navigate to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send,&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Material Stock ==&lt;br /&gt;
Inventory Stock is a function that will work regardless of connection status. However various features will be unavailable when there isn’t a “Live” connection. Inventory Stock will allow material items to be scanned and either a count (non-serialized) or serial number to be assigned. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;An inventory file is automatically stored under \Applications\SME Barcode\Inventory and can be retrieved by plugging the device into a Windows PC and navigating the folders on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Inventory Material Stock&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#From the main menu scroll up or down using the direction pad until Inventory Stock is highlighted. Select it using either the ENT key or the OK Button.&lt;br /&gt;
#A screen well appear with the default filename use to store the Inventory information. Default file is: TechID_Date_’incremental counter’ e.g. 6443_05_01_2011_003 &lt;br /&gt;
#Pressing Begin will advance you to the next screen allowing Inventory to begin. &lt;br /&gt;
#Pressing the ENT key will display a Save AS… screen allowing a custom file name to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The Inventory screen appears to begin scanning barcodes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once a barcode has been scanned a new screen will appear allowing a quantity to be entered or a serial number to be assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The screen will display the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;shelf&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;bin&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, at the top along with a listing of item scanned and either the qty or the S/N associated.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pressing NEXT will allow a new Location/shelf/bin to be selected. NOTE: Only items after a this change will reflect the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Non-Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Enter a quantity using the keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Continue scanning items with the same barcode or the same barcode until the desired count is met. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Press Save button to add this information to the Inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; DO NOT SCAN A DIFFERENT BARCODE- this will enter that barcode as the associated S/N for that item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Scan a S/N&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*This will return the application back to the Main Inventory screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Should an incorrect item and/or S/N be scanned, the item can be deleted by pressing the ENT key and then OK to confirm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Sending, Printing, Saving&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send to SME, and Print, are “Live Connection” only functions. They will not work if there is not a live connection. However the audit file will be saved regardless of the connection status. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Save is an Automatic function that happens whether you select Menu-Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Print will print the audit to any printer connected to the network the web service is on. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To print press the Menu button, navigate to Print and press the ENT key&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This function requires setup. Please see the Setting up a Printer section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Send will insert the audit information into SME for later processing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To send the audit to SME, press the menu button, navigate to Send, and press the ENT key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Transfer ==&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer Inventory is a “Live Only” feature, meaning there must be any active internet connection, allowing the device to update the SME database in “real-time”. Transfer Inventory will allow the user to select from a listing of open transfer orders or create a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Initializing a transfer&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From the main transfer screen a new transfer order can be created or an existing open transfer order can be enacted.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For a new Transfer Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*The device automatically Selects From as the location the device is in&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Highlight To and press ENT, highlight the desired location and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Select whether to Deplete stock or not &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Press Begin&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For an existing Transfer order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Highlight Transfer Order # and press ENT, highlight the order desired and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Press Begin&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding Items&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scan any item to add it to the transfer; however only available items at the correct location can be added to a transfer order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once an item has been scanned one of the following will happen based on inventory type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For serialized&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow serial numbers to be entered by keypad or scanning the S/N barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Multiple S/N can be scanned per item until need is met, the user presses the save button or scans another Order Item Barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* If an incorrect barcode is scanned into the S/N screen press the edit button and choose delete. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For non-Serialized&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow the user to enter the total quantity to be received or scan barcodes until all items have been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Switching Views&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function is really only applicable for transfers which began in SME. This allows you to view the items that have been placed on a transfer but don’t have items selected yet. Requested quantities will deplete as items are scanned for transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Press MENU highlight Switch View and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Closing a Transfer&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once all items desired have been added to a transfer order the order can be closed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Press MENU highlight Close Transfer and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
Print is a function that will allow the user to print certain things from the Hand-held terminal. However setup must be performed prior to use from a Windows PC with the device connected and active Sync installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to setup print, several pre-conditions must be met first:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*A printer must be connected to the same network as the web service&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*The web service server must have the printer installed (Drivers etc)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*The user of the device must have an account on the server with which to print from, &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*A “print” account should be set-up on the server granting restricted print access. (Recommended)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once the pre-conditions have been met, Follow the following steps as directed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Connect the device to a Windows PC with Active sync installed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Open the device through Windows Explorer and navigate to ‘\Applications\SME Barcode’&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Copy the file Settings.XML to your desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Right-Click the file on your desktop and select Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Edit the following lines:&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;PrinterPath&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;Domain&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The form should look something like this:   &lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;PrinterPath&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;\\BUFFETT\HP Photosmart D5100 series&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;Domain&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;HIGH5SOFTWARE&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Save the file&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Move the File back to the device ‘\Applications\SME Barcode’ selecting Move Replace.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Add-On_Guides&amp;diff=5302</id>
		<title>SME Add-On Guides</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Add-On_Guides&amp;diff=5302"/>
		<updated>2014-06-25T21:57:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;SME Mobile&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME Mobile Prerequisites]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME Mobile Master - Assign User Names]] - Assigning User Names and Passwords to Techs for access to SME Mobile&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME Mobile - Preference Groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME Mobile]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME Mobile - Change User Password]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Location Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Time Tracker for SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[TechPortal for SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[TechPortal Settings]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[TechService on Android for SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[CustomerPortal for SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[CustomerPortal Settings]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Warehouse Manager for SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Barcode for SME Reconciliation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Motorola Support for Barcode Scanner: http://www.motorola.com/Business/US-EN/Pages/Contact_Us#support_tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[CustomerPortal and TechPortal Install Guide]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Automated Email for SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Auditing for SME Setup]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Third Party Applications and Solutions&lt;br /&gt;
** [[TAPI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[POS with SME Mobile]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Barcode_for_SME&amp;diff=5299</id>
		<title>Barcode for SME</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Barcode_for_SME&amp;diff=5299"/>
		<updated>2014-06-24T21:53:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Notice:  Barcode for SME is changing to a browser based application along with a usb or bluetooth barcode device called &amp;quot;Warehouse Manager for SME&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
The old Barcode for SME using the MT2000 is being discontinued as of October 2013.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Warehouse Manager for SME ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse Manager for SME utilizes a browser device along with any usb or bluetooth barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
Website for this product is located at http://m.high5software.com/barcode.html&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to establish an account and login through SME Master at http://m.high5software.com/SMEMaster, then select applications&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Manager for SME is compatible with SME7.2 or SME8 although we recommend SME8 for best performance.&lt;br /&gt;
===Barcode Device for Warehouse Manager for SME===&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Manager for SME will technically work with any usb or bluetooth connected barcode.  However, it&amp;#039;s not possible for High 5 Software to test every device so we recommend you select a barcode that is compatible with your browser device (smartphone, tablet, laptop, or PC).&lt;br /&gt;
High5 has tested with the following devices:&lt;br /&gt;
* Socket mobile: http://ww1.socketmobile.com/products/bluetooth-scanners/how-to-buy/details.aspx?sku=CX2864-1336&lt;br /&gt;
* Motorola: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/US-EN/Product+Lines/Symbol/Symbol+Bar+Code+Scanners/Motorola+CS3000+Series_US-EN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Although some consumer applications are able to use a smartphone camera as a barcode device, we believe that the camera is not fast enough for industrial applications.  Therefore, you need a separate barcode dedicated barcode device for scanning.  These devices are tuned for speed and use fast laser or image scanning.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: RFID devices should also work, however have not yet been tested.&lt;br /&gt;
If you acquire a barcode or RFID device that is able to connect to your browser device (smartphone) but is not working properly with Warehouse Manager for SME, please contact support@h5sw.com and we will investigate.&lt;br /&gt;
===Browser Device for Barcode===&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Manager for SME will work with any modern browser except that we do NOT support IE-Internet Explorer because Microsoft does not follow standard internet protocols and constantly changes the browser making it not work properly.  Instead we recommend Chrome, Firefox or Safari on IOS devices.&lt;br /&gt;
This means that the Warehouse Manager will work on a SmartPhone, Tablet, Laptop or PC.  It&amp;#039;s VERY flexible.&lt;br /&gt;
The browser device is used as the screen and the connected barcode device is used for the scanning of the barcodes or RFIDs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Licensing and Pricing==&lt;br /&gt;
Pricing of Warehouse Manager for SME is $40 per named user per month or $995 plus $199 per year support.&lt;br /&gt;
This does not include the barcode nor the browser device as you would acquire that separately based on your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
Contact sales@high5software.com to activate your licenses.&lt;br /&gt;
==Functions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Receive PO&amp;#039;s===&lt;br /&gt;
To receive purchase orders click the drop down menu at the top of the bar code application and click &amp;quot;Receive Mode&amp;quot;. Now you&amp;#039;re ready to scan in items that were purchased and shipped to the warehouse to replenish your inventory. The workflow, starting from generating a purchase order, might look something like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create A Purchase Order====&lt;br /&gt;
Note: For a comprehensive guide to purchase orders in SME please see [[Purchase Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You noticed you&amp;#039;re running low on some items so you go into SME to create a purchase order to replenish your stock and buy some new items from your supplier. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Purchase Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in Inventory Module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The vendor information will populate the Vendor tab on Details and Settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Fill out the rest of the fields on Details and Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PO_DetailsAndSettings.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  PO #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This number will be auto-populated by SME.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reference #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - this field will be populated with the PO#. You can edit this field as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Date you created the PO&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Due Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select the date the parts are due in. You can sort by this field in the search window to manage your purchase orders.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click Customer to add the customer name to the PO. You can sort by this field in the search window.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Taken By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The SME user that created the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Requested By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – You can select the SME user that requested the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
*    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Approved By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select the SME user that approved the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
*   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; PO Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – You can customize this field to reflect the milestones each PO goes through (e.g. ready for approval, approved, sent to vendor, received). You can sort by this field in the search window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Items from Service, Add Items from Install or Add Items from Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. The Search window will open with all Service, Install or Invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Double click on an order and the materials on the order will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ViewItemsOnOrder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Double click on the material you want to add to the purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8. Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PO Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. Notice the material selected listed here.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9. Repeat steps 4-7 to add additional materials on order to the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Shipping Notes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add shipping notes to the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Find the PO in the Bar Code Application====&lt;br /&gt;
The next step is to find the PO that was just created in SME in the bar code application. Let&amp;#039;s say we purchased a &amp;quot;Telecare Package&amp;quot; consisting of a few different items for one of our technicians and had the items shipped to &amp;quot;Bob&amp;#039;s Van&amp;quot;. Bob needs to use the bar code application to scan these items into the system and verify that he has received them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Start at the home page for the bar code application http://m.high5software.com/Tech/Barcode.html&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose &amp;quot;Receive Mode&amp;quot; from the drop down menu at the top of the page&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the location where the PO items are being shipped to.&lt;br /&gt;
#A list of all of the purchase orders for that location will be shown. Select the PO you want to receive. There it is! PO number 104 from our favorite vendor, Dave&amp;#039;s Dainty Dress Shop. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Receive Mode PO List.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Receive PO====&lt;br /&gt;
Now let&amp;#039;s scan the items associated with the purchase order into SME&amp;#039;s inventory system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click on your PO to view the items that were shipped to that location&lt;br /&gt;
*Each item on the list will display the quantity remaining to be scanned (e.g. 0 of 1.0000 means that you&amp;#039;ve already scanned the single item of that type that was included in the PO. 1.0000 of 3.0000 means there is one item that still needs to be scanned, out of the three items of that type that were shipped)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Receive Mode Item List.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Scan the bar code of the item you want to identify as received (or type the Item Number into the text field and press Enter)&lt;br /&gt;
*If the item is not a serial part then it will immediately be received&lt;br /&gt;
*If the item IS a serial part you will type the item number, press enter, then type a unique serial number and press enter again&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Continue scanning until all of the items are received and the quantities remaining are all zero&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Confirm PO Actions in SME====&lt;br /&gt;
Now go back to SME into the Inventory module, to the Purchase Order category. Find the purchase order you just received and confirm that it is marked as received. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SME Receive Mode Confirmation.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pick Parts for Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Pick Mode&amp;quot; in the Warehouse Manager bar code application allows the user to pick and reserve parts for specific customer orders, and then move those selected parts to another location if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Pick Mode in the top drop down&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the warehouse location where you want to Pick From and Pick To.  &lt;br /&gt;
## If you are just reserving parts for an order, select the current or main warehouse where the parts are and the picking will reserve those parts for the order selected.&lt;br /&gt;
## If you want to reserve AND move, select the warehouse you want to move to for example to a tech warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the order you are picking for.  You can use barcode to select the order if you have a barcode for the order number&lt;br /&gt;
# Barcode the part or serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
## The application will look for barcode in the part number, manufacturing part number, or any of the vendor part numbers for associated vendor parts for a specific part (alternate parts in SME&amp;gt;Inventory&amp;gt;Vendors tab).&lt;br /&gt;
## If the part is serialized, barcode the serial number next.&lt;br /&gt;
## If the part is not serialized it will pick the part for this order.&lt;br /&gt;
# Pick Messages:&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;quot;No Stock Available&amp;quot;  If SME does not have any stock, you will get &amp;quot;No Stock Available&amp;quot; and will need to resolve the stock quantities in SME for example maybe the part has not been received or was already selected for another order.&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;quot;Fully Picked&amp;quot;  If all the parts are already picked for that part a message will show &amp;quot;Fully Picked&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
## &amp;quot;Did not receive&amp;quot;  Error code -8.  Was unable to select the part for various reasons.  Check in SME to determine why that part is not selectable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Transfer Parts between Warehouses===&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer mode is intended to be used when moving inventory between warehouses. For example, Bob the technician notices that he is running low on the stock of routers that he keeps in his van and gets some more. To keep track of where the company&amp;#039;s assets are Bob would scan those items using Transfer Mode when he takes them from the warehouse and puts them in his van. Let&amp;#039;s go through the steps he would follow: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Transfer Mode&amp;quot; at the top of the bar code application&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the location that you are transferring inventory FROM in the large &amp;quot;Location&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose the location that you are transferring inventory TO in the smaller &amp;quot;To&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the quantity of a specific type of item you&amp;#039;d like to transfer&lt;br /&gt;
# Scan the bar code (or type in the Item Number and press Enter)&lt;br /&gt;
# A confirmation message is displayed and you can verify that those items were transferred to the new location&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  ==&lt;br /&gt;
==  ==&lt;br /&gt;
== OLD Barcode for SME ==&lt;br /&gt;
THIS PRODUCT IS DISCONTINUED AS OF OCTOBER 2013!&lt;br /&gt;
Old Barcode for SME is using the Motorola MT2000 with built-in software. This product is being discontinued as of October 2013 and will no longer be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Device Recommendations ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Motorola/Symbol MT2000 series is the only device that works with Barcode for SME.  You will need the WiFi capability rather than just BlueTooth for greater range throughout the warehouse, so we recommend the MT2090 version.  Most barcodes are 1D so you could go with the SR Laser which only supports 1D barcodes, however the trend is towards 2D barcodes and to future-proof your device, we recommend a 2D imager rather than just the 1D laser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specific Device Recommendation for barcode with 2D imager and WiFi, these are kits that include the charger:&lt;br /&gt;
* For 2D standard image recognition (this will work for most applications)&lt;br /&gt;
** US: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-sl2000c1us.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 SR Imager 2D US Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
** Worldwide: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-sd2000c1ww.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 SR Imager 2D WW Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
* For High Density image recognition (this will give greatest flexibility for label scanning, usually slightly higher price):&lt;br /&gt;
** US: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-hd2000c1us.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 HD Imager 2D US Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
**Worldwide: [http://www.barcodesinc.com/motorola/part-kt-2090-hd2000c1ww.htm?aff-isv-HIG001 MT2090 HD Imager 2D WW Kit]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Login ==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use the device a user must login. These credentials will be used to access the SME database, and for settings in various other functions. A “live” connection does not need to be present in order to login. However the device requires login to operate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;User Login&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Upon each use of the SME Barcode the device will require the user to login. It will attempt to check the credentials through SME and return whether they were valid. If they are not valid, OR a disconnected state is desired select OK. Otherwise Select Retry to re-enter user credentials. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When the user is ready to close the application Selecting Close instead of log-out will allow the application to be ran again using the same user Login Credentials as previous. A Logout would allow a new user to login.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Initial Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two main portions to setup the device, both will be automatically presented upon initial use, and can be accessed later through the menu. First is obtaining the web service url for use on the device. The other is choosing the default location of the device. [Print Setup will be covered in a different section]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Obtaining the Web Service URL&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* The Web service Setup screen will be the first screen presented upon initial use. &lt;br /&gt;
* This requires a “Live” connection, but can be bypassed by pressing the Menu button and selecting Home. This will bypass login and run in a disconnected state.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the correct information and press Login. The URL will be obtained and stored within the device.&lt;br /&gt;
* Should the URL need to be changed for any reason, press the Menu button from the Login Screen and select Setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Choosing a Location for the device&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* The device location will be the second screen that appears upon initial use. &lt;br /&gt;
* This requires a Live Connection; if a live connection doesn’t exist this function is not available. However once it has been set it will remain in the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Receiving Purchase Order Items ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PO Receive is a “Live Only” feature, meaning there must be any active internet connection, allowing the device to update the SME database in “real-time”. PO Receive will allow the user to navigate through a listing of Open Purchase Orders selecting the desired PO by keypad or by scanning a barcode associated with the PO Number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Selecting a Purchase Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main menu, scroll using the direction pad until PO Receive is highlighted. Select using either ENT or the OK Button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A purchase order can be selected by one of the following ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scroll to the Order desired; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Type in the Order Number in the box; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scanning a barcode relating to the Order Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Receiving Items on a Purchase Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Listed next are all the material items for the Order. Once an item is selected or scanned (same as above) a screen will appear based on whether the item is serialized or non-serialized&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow serial numbers to be entered by keypad or scanning the S/N barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Multiple S/N can be scanned per item until need is met, the user presses the save button or scans another Order Item Barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* If an incorrect barcode is scanned into the S/N screen press the edit button and choose delete. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For non-serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow the user to enter the total quantity to be received or scan barcodes until all items have been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once all items have been received the order will be closed unless it contains un-received service or package items. If so a message will display indicating this to be true and a count of each.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding New Manufacture/Vendor Part Numbers&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Should a vendor change the barcode for an item, the device will allow adding a new barcode associated with the item. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you scan an item if the device does not recognize the item, it will prompt whether you would like to add the barcode to an item on the order. Pressing yes will bring up a list of items on the order. Simply choose the correct item and press ENT. The new association will be added to SME and receiving can continue as before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reserving Items for a Customer Order  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reserve Items is a “Live Only” feature, meaning there must be any active internet connection, allowing the device to update the SME database in “real-time”. Reserve Items will allow the user to navigate through a listing of Open Customer Orders selecting the desired Customer Order by keypad or by scanning a barcode associated with the Order Number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Selecting a Customer Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From the main menu scroll up or down using the direction pad until &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reserve Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is highlighted selecting it using either the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; key or the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ok&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
Listed in ascending order are all the open Customer orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A Customer order can be selected by one of the following ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scroll to the Order desired; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Type in the Order Number in the box; press ENT or the right menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scanning a barcode relating to the Order Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Reserving Items on an Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Listed next is all the material items for the Order&lt;br /&gt;
Once an item is selected or scanned (same as above) a screen will appear based on whether the item is serialized or non-serialized&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow serial numbers to be entered by keypad or scanning the S/N barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Multiple S/N can be scanned per item until need is met, the user presses the save button or scans another Item Barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* If the item is reserved for another order a window will appear indicating this item cannot be used and another must be chosen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For non-serialized items:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow the user to enter the total quantity to be reserved or scan barcodes until the total needed or available has been reached&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Transferring a Customer Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once items for an order have been reserved, they can be transferred from one location to another. Note that only reserved items can be transferred and all items get transferred at once. The items will remain reserved but will be listed in the new location. Should you like to transfer available items please see Inventory Transfer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* From the order items screen press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MENU&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button, highlight &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and press &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Highlight the location you would like to transfer to and press &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Auditing Customer Equipment ==&lt;br /&gt;
Audit Customer Equipment is a function that will work regardless of connection status. However various features will be unavailable when there isn’t a “Live” connection. Audit Customer Equipment will allow equipment to be scanned and either a count (non-serialized) or serial number to be assigned. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;An Audit file is automatically stored under \Applications\SME Barcode\Equipment and can be retrieved by plugging the device into a Windows PC and navigating the folders on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. From the main menu scroll up or down using the direction pad until Audit Equipment is highlighted. Select it using either the ENT key or the OK Button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. A screen well appear with the default filename use to store the Audit information. Default file is: TechID_Date_’incremental counter’ e.g. 6443_05_01_2011_003 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Pressing Begin will advance you to the next screen allowing Audit to begin. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Pressing the ENT key will display a Save AS… screen allowing a custom file name to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. The Location Screen appears allowing a new Location to be Entered, Scanned, or Chosen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  * To find a location to choose press Find button&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  * Highlight the desired location and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  * Press NEXT to continue to the Audit Screen&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. The Audit screen appears to begin scanning barcodes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Once a barcode has been scanned a new screen will appear allowing a quantity to be entered or a serial number to be assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8. The screen will Display the location at the top with a listing of Item Scanned and either the qty or the S/N associated.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9. Pressing NEXT will allow a new Location to be selected. NOTE: Only items after a location change will reflect the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Non-Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Enter a quantity using the keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Continue scanning equipment with the same barcode or the same barcode until the desired count is met. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Press Save button to add this information to the audit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: DO NOT SCAN A DIFFERENT BARCODE- this will enter that barcode as the associated S/N for that item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Scan a S/N&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This will return the application back to the Main Audit screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Should an incorrect item and/or S/N be scanned, the item can be deleted by pressing the ENT key and then OK to confirm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Sending, Printing, Saving&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Send to SME and Print are “Live Connection” only functions. They will not work if there is not a live connection. However the audit file will be saved regardless of the connection status. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Save is an Automatic function that happens whether you select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Back&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Menu-Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.Menu-Save can also be selected which will save the audit and remain on this screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Print will print the audit to any printer connected to the network the web service is on. To print press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Menu&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button, navigate to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; key&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This function requires setup. Please see the Setting up a Printer section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Send will insert the audit information into SME for later processing. To send the audit to SME, press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Menu&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button, navigate to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send,&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and press the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ENT&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Material Stock ==&lt;br /&gt;
Inventory Stock is a function that will work regardless of connection status. However various features will be unavailable when there isn’t a “Live” connection. Inventory Stock will allow material items to be scanned and either a count (non-serialized) or serial number to be assigned. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;An inventory file is automatically stored under \Applications\SME Barcode\Inventory and can be retrieved by plugging the device into a Windows PC and navigating the folders on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Inventory Material Stock&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#From the main menu scroll up or down using the direction pad until Inventory Stock is highlighted. Select it using either the ENT key or the OK Button.&lt;br /&gt;
#A screen well appear with the default filename use to store the Inventory information. Default file is: TechID_Date_’incremental counter’ e.g. 6443_05_01_2011_003 &lt;br /&gt;
#Pressing Begin will advance you to the next screen allowing Inventory to begin. &lt;br /&gt;
#Pressing the ENT key will display a Save AS… screen allowing a custom file name to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The Inventory screen appears to begin scanning barcodes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once a barcode has been scanned a new screen will appear allowing a quantity to be entered or a serial number to be assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The screen will display the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;shelf&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;bin&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, at the top along with a listing of item scanned and either the qty or the S/N associated.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pressing NEXT will allow a new Location/shelf/bin to be selected. NOTE: Only items after a this change will reflect the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Non-Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Enter a quantity using the keypad.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Continue scanning items with the same barcode or the same barcode until the desired count is met. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Press Save button to add this information to the Inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; DO NOT SCAN A DIFFERENT BARCODE- this will enter that barcode as the associated S/N for that item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Serialized:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Scan a S/N&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*This will return the application back to the Main Inventory screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Should an incorrect item and/or S/N be scanned, the item can be deleted by pressing the ENT key and then OK to confirm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Sending, Printing, Saving&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send to SME, and Print, are “Live Connection” only functions. They will not work if there is not a live connection. However the audit file will be saved regardless of the connection status. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Save is an Automatic function that happens whether you select Menu-Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Print will print the audit to any printer connected to the network the web service is on. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To print press the Menu button, navigate to Print and press the ENT key&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This function requires setup. Please see the Setting up a Printer section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Send will insert the audit information into SME for later processing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To send the audit to SME, press the menu button, navigate to Send, and press the ENT key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Transfer ==&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer Inventory is a “Live Only” feature, meaning there must be any active internet connection, allowing the device to update the SME database in “real-time”. Transfer Inventory will allow the user to select from a listing of open transfer orders or create a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Initializing a transfer&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From the main transfer screen a new transfer order can be created or an existing open transfer order can be enacted.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For a new Transfer Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*The device automatically Selects From as the location the device is in&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Highlight To and press ENT, highlight the desired location and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*Select whether to Deplete stock or not &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Press Begin&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For an existing Transfer order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Highlight Transfer Order # and press ENT, highlight the order desired and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Press Begin&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding Items&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scan any item to add it to the transfer; however only available items at the correct location can be added to a transfer order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once an item has been scanned one of the following will happen based on inventory type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For serialized&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow serial numbers to be entered by keypad or scanning the S/N barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* Multiple S/N can be scanned per item until need is met, the user presses the save button or scans another Order Item Barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* If an incorrect barcode is scanned into the S/N screen press the edit button and choose delete. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;For non-Serialized&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;* This screen will allow the user to enter the total quantity to be received or scan barcodes until all items have been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Switching Views&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This function is really only applicable for transfers which began in SME. This allows you to view the items that have been placed on a transfer but don’t have items selected yet. Requested quantities will deplete as items are scanned for transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Press MENU highlight Switch View and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Closing a Transfer&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once all items desired have been added to a transfer order the order can be closed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Press MENU highlight Close Transfer and press ENT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print Setup ==&lt;br /&gt;
Print is a function that will allow the user to print certain things from the Hand-held terminal. However setup must be performed prior to use from a Windows PC with the device connected and active Sync installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to setup print, several pre-conditions must be met first:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*A printer must be connected to the same network as the web service&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*The web service server must have the printer installed (Drivers etc)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*The user of the device must have an account on the server with which to print from, &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*A “print” account should be set-up on the server granting restricted print access. (Recommended)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once the pre-conditions have been met, Follow the following steps as directed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Connect the device to a Windows PC with Active sync installed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Open the device through Windows Explorer and navigate to ‘\Applications\SME Barcode’&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Copy the file Settings.XML to your desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Right-Click the file on your desktop and select Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Edit the following lines:&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;PrinterPath&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;Domain&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The form should look something like this:   &lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;PrinterPath&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;\\BUFFETT\HP Photosmart D5100 series&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;add key=&amp;quot;Domain&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;HIGH5SOFTWARE&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Save the file&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Move the File back to the device ‘\Applications\SME Barcode’ selecting Move Replace.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5296</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5296"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:47:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png|border]]&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5295</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5295"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:47:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png|border]]&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5294</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5294"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:46:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png|border]]&amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot;[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5293</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5293"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:45:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png|border]]{{Spaces|20}}[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5292</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5292"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:39:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png|border]]{{Nb5}}[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5291</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5291"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:38:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png|border]]{{spaces20}}[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5290</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5290"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:37:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png|border]]{spaces|20}[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5289</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5289"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:36:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png|border]]{{spaces|20}}[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5288</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5288"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:31:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png|border]]                                                  [[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5287</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5287"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:30:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5286</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5286"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:30:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png|border|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|border|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5285</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5285"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:29:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png|border|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|border|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5284</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5284"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:27:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png|border|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|border|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5283</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5283"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:27:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style={display:inline;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5282</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5282"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:25:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style={display:inline;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5281</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5281"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:24:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style={display:inline;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction2.png|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:MakeRecurringAction2.png&amp;diff=5280</id>
		<title>File:MakeRecurringAction2.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:MakeRecurringAction2.png&amp;diff=5280"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:24:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:MakeRecurringAction.png&amp;diff=5279</id>
		<title>File:MakeRecurringAction.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:MakeRecurringAction.png&amp;diff=5279"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:23:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: uploaded a new version of &amp;amp;quot;File:MakeRecurringAction.png&amp;amp;quot;: Reverted to version as of 21:53, 20 June 2014&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:MakeRecurringAction.png&amp;diff=5278</id>
		<title>File:MakeRecurringAction.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:MakeRecurringAction.png&amp;diff=5278"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:22:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: uploaded a new version of &amp;amp;quot;File:MakeRecurringAction.png&amp;amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5277</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5277"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:14:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style={display:inline;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5276</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5276"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:09:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style={display:inline;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction.png|frame|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5275</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5275"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:07:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction.png|frame|left]][[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5274</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5274"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T22:01:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringAction.png|frame|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5273</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5273"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T21:59:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MakeRecurringActions.png|frame|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RecurringTemplateFields.png|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill out the resulting template page and save your recurring job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SMO will generate a job in advance of the job due date according to how many days in advance the user specifies. When the job is generated the only action that is necessary is to invoice it using the green invoice button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab. If that job isn&amp;#039;t relevant on that recurrence then the user can just as easily close the job using the blue close button in the main &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:RecurringTemplateFields.png&amp;diff=5272</id>
		<title>File:RecurringTemplateFields.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:RecurringTemplateFields.png&amp;diff=5272"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T21:54:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:MakeRecurringAction.png&amp;diff=5271</id>
		<title>File:MakeRecurringAction.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:MakeRecurringAction.png&amp;diff=5271"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T21:53:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5270</id>
		<title>SMO Jobs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SMO_Jobs&amp;diff=5270"/>
		<updated>2014-06-20T21:01:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Coryc: /* Recurring Jobs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Back to [[SMO]] main page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMOJobListPrintscreen.jpg|frame|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The jobs tab enables the user to view all of the jobs in SMO history, with the ability to look at jobs for all customers or jobs for one customer. Additionally, the user can choose to look at all the jobs for a single customer for all job sites associated with that customer, or simply the jobs for one job site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Add New Job=&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new job: &lt;br /&gt;
#select a customer and job site from their respective dropdown lists&lt;br /&gt;
#click the &amp;quot;Add New Job&amp;quot; button at the top of the job list, or select &amp;quot;Add Job&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; dropdown list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Job&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
*Reference Number: assign the job a title/number&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date: assign the job a due date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type: describe the job (installation, repair, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
*Assigned To: assign a technician/employee from your list of employees &lt;br /&gt;
**Remember, your list of employees can be found under &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Status&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: To alter the options available in the &amp;quot;status&amp;quot; dropdown list, just go to &amp;quot;settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Lists&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Add New&amp;quot; job status. If the user tries to create a new job with a blank status an error message will result. The user must populate the status field in order to create a new job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Job Contact: choose one of the contacts from the company that is relevant to the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person: Assign a salesperson from your list of employees&lt;br /&gt;
*Summary: short description of the job&lt;br /&gt;
*Name and Signature: user can authorize the job with their name and signature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Make notes about the job under the following headings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Site Notes&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Request&lt;br /&gt;
*Service Performed&lt;br /&gt;
*Private&lt;br /&gt;
*Customer&lt;br /&gt;
*System Notes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to log time spent on a job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Stopwatch: Use the stopwatch at the top of the job page&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time (overtime, travel time, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
**Start the stopwatch&lt;br /&gt;
**Stop the stopwatch when the work is over&lt;br /&gt;
**The elapsed time will automatically be logged under the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab&lt;br /&gt;
**NOTE: Time logged using the stopwatch is automatically billed to the customer. If you want to log non-billable time, see below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Time Tab: Alternatively you can add increments of time manually by clicking on the &amp;quot;Time&amp;quot; tab under a job&lt;br /&gt;
**Select &amp;quot;Add Time&amp;quot; to log time that has already been spent working or select &amp;quot;Add Schedule&amp;quot; to log time that will be spent working in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
**Select the field technician you have assigned to the task&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the type of time&lt;br /&gt;
**Select the start date and time&lt;br /&gt;
**Input the number of hours worked&lt;br /&gt;
**Decide whether that time is billable to the customer or not&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Add items to be used or purchased that are associated with the job. &lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
*Price per Unit&lt;br /&gt;
*Description&lt;br /&gt;
*Subtotal Price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Upload documents associated with the job&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Custom Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
Custom fields give the user the ability to create infinitely customizable documents containing text boxes, dropdown lists, tables, legends and more that are relevant to the specific task they assign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While working in the custom fields tab, the user also has the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email: The &amp;quot;email&amp;quot; button will send a copy of the custom fields page to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send Email: The &amp;quot;send email&amp;quot; button will open a dialog box which allows the user to write a normal email to the correspondent of their choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Job Actions=&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an existing job click on a job reference number or title in the job list. That will bring up the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Convert to Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice and Pay===&lt;br /&gt;
Gives the user the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Job&lt;br /&gt;
**Goes back to the job&amp;#039;s main page&lt;br /&gt;
*Print&lt;br /&gt;
**Converts the invoice to a PDF to allow for printing a hard copy&lt;br /&gt;
*Email&lt;br /&gt;
**Will email an invoice to the contact for the selected customer/company. The invoice contains the date of the invoice, the customer/company name, the invoice number/title, a customizable summary and the total monetary amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email===&lt;br /&gt;
Sends a job report to the contact listed for the selected customer/company which contains the following info:&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Number&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Name&lt;br /&gt;
*Due Date&lt;br /&gt;
*Class Type&lt;br /&gt;
*Technician assigned to job&lt;br /&gt;
*Job Status&lt;br /&gt;
*Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary Contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Recurring Jobs=&lt;br /&gt;
The recurring job feature allows the user to create a job that will be performed on a regular basis (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly) so that SMO will automatically generate the job for each occurrence rather than the user having to input the same job info for each occurrence. SMO will also create the job a number of days in advance (specified by the user) to alert the user that the job is coming up again soon. To create a recurring job:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a job as you normally would by going to the &amp;quot;Jobs&amp;quot; tab, adding a new job, entering details and saving it. &lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any notes, attach documents, assign items or labor and designate custom fields as you normally would&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Make Recurring&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; drop down menu&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Coryc</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>